Toshiba Barcode Reader B Sv4d Gs User Manual

TOSHIBA TEC Bar Code Printer  
B-SV4D-GS/GC10-QM  
External Equipment Interface Specification  
First Edition:  
Jun. 02, 2003  
Page  
6.3.21 GRAPHIC COMMAND ..................................................................................................... 146  
6.3.22 SAVE START COMMAND ............................................................................................... 154  
6.3.23 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND ...................................................................................... 156  
6.3.24 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND..................................................................................... 157  
6.3.25 RESET COMMAND.......................................................................................................... 158  
6.3.26 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND..................................................................................... 159  
6.3.27 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND............................. 160  
6.3.28 VERSI0N INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND........................................................... 162  
6.3.29 MEMORY BOARD INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND............................................ 163  
6.3.30 PRINTER INFORMATION STORE COMMAND .............................................................. 165  
6.3.31 PRINTER INFORMATION REQUEST COMMAND ......................................................... 166  
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR .................................................................. 167  
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND ....................................................................................... 167  
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND ............................................................... 170  
6.4.3 BATCH RESET COMMAND............................................................................................. 172  
7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION................................................................................................. 173  
8. ERROR PROCESSING.............................................................................................................. 174  
8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS ............................................................................................... 174  
8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING.................................................................................... 174  
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES .................... 176  
9. STATUS RESPONSE................................................................................................................. 177  
9.1 SERIAL INTERFACE............................................................................................................. 177  
9.1.1 FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................... 177  
9.1.2 STATUS FORMAT ........................................................................................................... 177  
9.1.3 DETAIL STATUS.............................................................................................................. 178  
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE ....................................................................................................... 179  
10. LED INDICATIONS..................................................................................................................... 181  
ii  
Page  
11. CHARACTER CODE TABLE..................................................................................................... 183  
11.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER............... 183  
11.2 PRESENTATION................................................................................................................... 190  
11.3 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 ......................................................................................................... 194  
11.4 TrueType FONT..................................................................................................................... 201  
12. BAR CODE TABLE.................................................................................................................... 208  
13. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA.............................................................................................. 221  
14. AUTOMATIC ADDING OF START/STOP CODE...................................................................... 242  
iii  
1. SCOPE  
This specification applies to the external equipment interface for use with the Model B-SV4D general-  
purpose thermal label/tag printers.  
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION  
The external equipment interface connects a printer to the host computer through a serial interface (RS-  
232C), parallel interface (Centronics), or a network for making various settings and printing labels.  
This specification describes how to use the external equipment interface.  
The model configuration is described below.  
B-SV4D  
Flash ROM  
DRAM  
1 MB  
2 MB  
Memory  
Interface  
Standard  
RS-232C  
Centronics  
USB  
Option  
LAN adapter  
Full cut  
Cutter  
Partial cut (option)  
Option  
Strip module  
- 1 -  
3. INTERFACE  
3.1 SERIAL INTERFACE  
(1) Type  
: Conforming to RS-232C  
(2) Mode of Communication : Full duplex  
(3) Transmission Speed  
: 2400 BPS  
4800 BPS  
9600 BPS  
19200 BPS  
38400 BPS  
57600 BPS  
(4) Synchronization Method : Start-stop synchronization  
(5) Start Bit  
(6) Stop Bit  
: 1 bit  
: 1 bit  
2 bits  
(7) Data Length  
(8) Parity  
: 7 bits  
8 bits  
: None  
Even  
Odd  
(9) Error Detection  
: Parity Error  
Framing Error  
Vertical parity error check  
This error occurs if no stop bit is found in the frame  
specified starting with the start bit.  
Overrun Error  
This error occurs if the next data is input before the  
data input to the UART from the host is read by the  
printer CPU.  
(10) Protocol  
: No-procedure method  
(11) Data Input Code  
: ASCII code  
European character set 8 bit code  
Graphics 8 bit code  
(12) Receive Buffer  
: 515K bytes  
- 2 -  
(13) Transmission Control  
Protocol  
: XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol  
READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol  
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR)  
RTS Protocol  
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol  
When initialized after power on, this printer becomes ready to receive data and sends an  
XON code (11H). (Transmission or non-transmission of the XON code is selectable by  
means of the parameter setting.)  
The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the blank positions in the receive buffer  
become 1K bytes or less.  
The printer sends an XON code (11H) when the blank positions in the receive buffer are 2K  
bytes or more.  
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received  
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the  
XOFF code, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer  
becomes full.)  
The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off. (Transmission or non-  
transmission of the XOFF code is selectable by means of the parameter setting.)  
READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol  
When initialized after power on, this printer becomes ready to receive data and turns the  
DTR signal to “High” level (READY).  
The printer turns the DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) when the blank positions in the  
receive buffer are 1K bytes or less.  
The printer turns the DTR signal to “High” level (READY) when the blank positions in the  
receive buffer are 2K bytes or more.  
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received  
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the  
BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer  
becomes full.)  
The RTS signal is always “High”.  
- 3 -  
XON/XOFF (DC1/DC3) Protocol + READY/BUSY (DTR) Protocol  
When initialized after power on, this printer becomes ready to receive data and turns the  
DTR signal to “High” level (READY). The printer also sends an XON code (11H).  
When the blank positions in the receive buffer are 1K bytes or less, the printer turns the  
DTR signal to “Low” level (BUSY) and sends an XOFF code (13H).  
When the blank positions in the receive buffer are 2K bytes or more, the printer turns the  
DTR signal to “High” level (READY) and sends an XON code (11H).  
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received  
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the  
XOFF code or BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer  
receive buffer becomes full.)  
The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) when the power is off.  
The RTS signal is always “High”.  
RTS Protocol  
When initialized after the power is turned on, this printer turns the RTS signal to “High”  
(READY).  
The printer turns the RTS signal to “Low” (BUSY) when the blank positions in the receive  
buffer are 1K bytes or less.  
The printer turns the RTS signal to “High” (READY) when the blank positions in the receive  
buffer are 2K bytes or more.  
When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards data received  
exceeding the receive buffer capacity, without storing it in the buffer. (After detecting the  
BUSY signal, the host computer must stop transmission before the printer receive buffer  
becomes full.)  
The DTR signal is always “High” (READY).  
- 4 -  
(14) RS-232 Interface pin configuration  
Host Function  
9 Pin  
25 Pin  
9 Pin  
Printer Function  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+5V  
TxD  
RxD  
DSR  
GND  
RDY  
N/C  
RxD  
TxD  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
2
20  
7
6
4
DTR  
GND  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
5
RDY  
+5V  
(15) Connector Pin Assignment and Signal Description  
Signal  
Pin No.  
Function  
Signal Direction  
Name  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
+5V  
TxD  
RxD  
DSR  
GND  
RDY  
N/C  
Provide the power of 5V  
Transmit data  
Printer  
Host  
Host  
Receive data  
Data set ready  
General Ground  
Printer ready  
Printer →  
Not connected  
RDY  
+5V  
Printer ready  
Printer →  
Provide the power of 5V  
- 5 -  
3.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE  
(1) Type  
(2) Mode  
: Centronics  
: Conforms to IEEE1284 compatible mode  
(3) Data Input Method : Parallel 8 bits (DATA1 ~ 8)  
(4) Control Signals  
: ACK, BUSY, SELECT, DATA • STB, FAULT, PE, INIT (Not used),  
AUTOFD (Not used), SELECTIN (Not used)  
(5) Data Input Code  
: ASCII code  
European character set 8 bit code  
Graphics 8 bit code  
(6) Receive Buffer  
(7) Connector  
: 515K bytes  
: Printer  
Amp. Japan  
DDK  
552742-1 or equivalent  
57RE-40360-73B or equivalent  
Cable  
Amp. Japan  
DDK  
552470-1 or equivalent  
57E-30360 or equivalent  
- 6 -  
(8) Connector Pin Diagram:  
Pin No.  
Signal Name  
Pin No.  
Signal Name  
1
2
DATA • STB  
DATA 1  
DATA 2  
DATA 3  
DATA 4  
DATA 5  
DATA 6  
DATA 7  
DATA 8  
ACK  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN1)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN2)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN3)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN4)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN5)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN6)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN7)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN8)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN9)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN10)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN11)  
TWISTED PAIR GND (PIN31)  
INIT (Not used)  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
BUSY  
PE  
SELECT  
AUTOFD (Not used)  
NC  
FAULT  
0V  
0V  
NC  
CHASSIS GND  
+5V  
NC  
SELECTIN (Not used)  
19  
1
36  
18  
- 7 -  
4. KEY OPERATION FUNCTIONS  
4.1 SYSTEM MODE (POWER UP WITH KEY PRESSED)  
There are 6 LED light indications with following sequence.  
(1) Solid orange indicates the printer has entered into system mode  
(2) Green and red alternate  
(3) Flashing orange  
(4) Green and orange alternate  
(5) Orange and red alternate  
(6) Solid green  
4.1.1 Firmware downloading mode  
1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (2) and push again immediately.  
2) Copy the firmware file to printer parallel port by the following command is MS-DOS prompt  
mode.  
C:\>COPY XXXXXX.NEW /B LPT1:  
3) The LED will change to green color and blinking every one-second. When firmware update is  
completed, printer will reset automatically.  
4.1.2 Auto call cancellation  
1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (3).  
2) The printer will cancel Auto Call execution. (Refer to 6.3.24)  
4.1.3 Parameter clearance  
1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (4).  
2) The printer will restore to manufacturer’s default setting and reset automatically.  
4.1.4 Sensor calibration  
1) Install a label/tag roll with the sensor located at proper position.  
2) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (5).  
3) The printer will set the sensor property for the installed media and measures label length.  
4.1.5 Self-test / Dump mode  
1) Release FEED key at LED light sequence (6).  
2) The printer will print self-test then enter the dump mode.  
- 8 -  
[Self-test printing]  
a. Printing program version & check sum  
b. Printing various parameters  
Parameter  
Initial value  
Print density fine adjustment  
Print position fine adjustment  
Amount for finely the cut position  
Type of character code  
Font of zero  
0
0 mm  
0 mm  
PC-850  
0 (without slash)  
9600 bps  
8 bits  
Communication speed  
Data length  
Stop bit length  
1 bit  
Parity  
NONE  
2
Transmission control  
Forward feed wait  
Control code  
ON  
AUTO  
FEED  
Feed key function  
Euro code  
B0 H  
X-coordinate adjustment  
Sensor selection  
0 mm  
Transmissive  
4.2 ONLINE MODE FUNCTIONS  
The online mode provides the following functions for issuing labels.  
(1) Issuing labels (by external equipment interface commands)  
(2) Paper feed (by the [FEED] key)  
(3) Error indication  
(4) Sensor selection  
Transmissive sensor, reflective sensor and non-sensor mode are available.  
To select the sensor for the media, turn on power to let printer online mode. Open printer cover,  
the LED will be turned off. Press FEED key for over 5 seconds, and then release the button, then  
printer will enter sensor selection mode.  
In sensor selection mode, if LED is changed to green color and press FEED key again, then  
reflective sensor is selected.  
If LED is changed to orange color and press FEED key again, then non-sensor is selected.  
If LED is changed to red color and press FEED key again, then transmissive sensor is selected.  
- 9 -  
5. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE  
This section describes the outline of the transmission sequence.  
5.1 INITIALIZATION  
Writable characters, logo, and PC interface commands must be stored before the label issue  
operation.  
(1) Storing writable characters and logo  
Power ON  
No  
<New>  
Yes  
(Add/change)  
[ESC] J1: Formats the flash memory on the  
Memory board  
memory board.  
Format Command  
[ESC] XD: Stores writable characters or a  
logo on the flash memory board.  
Bit Map Writable  
Character Command  
No  
Completion of storing  
all characters  
Yes  
Storing PC interface commands  
Label issue operation  
NOTES: (1) The storage of PC commands is only performed if it is required.  
(2) When the flash memory board is used, and the Memory board Format Command is not  
sent before storing already stored writable characters or logos, memory will be taken up  
with every such storing.  
(3) When the flash memory board is used, and another operation (storing PC interface  
commands or label issue operation) is performed after storing writable characters or  
logos, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.  
(4) If another storing operation does not take place after storing writable characters or  
logos, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation) after  
about 10 seconds. In this case, when the flash memory board is used, the image buffer  
will be cleared automatically.  
- 10 -  
(2) Storing PC interface commands  
Power ON  
No  
<New>  
Yes  
(Add/change)  
[ESC] J1: Formats the flash memory board.  
Memory board  
Format Command  
[ESC] XO: Declares the start of saving PC interface  
commands.  
Save Start Command  
[ESC] D: Sets the label size.  
Label Size Set Command  
[ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length, cut position, and  
back feed length.  
Position Fine  
Adjust Command  
Print Density Fine  
Adjust Command  
[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.  
[ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.  
Image Buffer Clear Command  
Line Format Command  
[ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.  
[ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.  
Bit Map Font Format Command  
Outline Font Format Command  
Bar Code Format Command  
Bit Map Font Data Command  
Save Terminate Command  
[ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.  
[ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.  
[ESC] RC: Draws data of the bit map font.  
[ESC] XP: Declares the termination of saving PC  
interface commands.  
No  
Completion of  
all storing  
Yes  
Storing writable characters or logos  
Label issue operation  
NOTES: (1) The storage of PC commands is only performed if it is required.  
(2) When the flash memory card is used, and the Memory board Format Command is not  
sent before storing already stored PC interface commands, memory will be taken up with  
every such storing.  
(3) When the flash memory board is used, and another operation (storing writable characters  
or logos, label issue operation) is performed after storing PC interface commands, the  
image buffer will be cleared automatically.  
(4) Select commands to be stored as the occasion demands.  
(5) If another storing operation does not take place after storing PC interface commands, the  
printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10 seconds. In this  
case, when the flash memory board is used, the image buffer will be cleared  
automatically.  
- 11 -  
5.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION  
An example of the label issue operation is described below.  
(1) Where the Saved Data Call Command is not used:  
Power ON  
Place paper  
[ESC] D: Sets the label size.  
Label Size Set Command  
[ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length, cut position, and  
back feed length.  
Position Fine  
Adjust Command  
Print Density Fine  
Adjust Command  
[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density.  
[ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it  
with the first printing position.  
Feed Command  
[ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.  
[ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.  
[ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.  
[ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.  
[ESC] XB: Sets the bar code format.  
Image Buffer Clear Command  
Line Format Command  
Bit Map Font Format Command  
Outline Font Format Command  
Bar Code Format Command  
[ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.  
[ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.  
[ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.  
[ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.  
Bit Map Font Data Command  
Outline Font Data Command  
Bar Code Data Command  
Issue Command  
Yes  
<Change data issue>  
No  
Yes  
<Format change>  
No  
Yes  
<Label change>  
No  
Power OFF  
NOTES: (1) When placing new paper, the Label Size Set Command and Feed Command must  
always be sent. When using the same paper after the power is turned off and on, the  
Label Size Set Command and Feed Command may be omitted.  
(2) After the power is turned off and on, the Bit Map Font Format Command, the Outline  
Font Format Command, and the Bar Code Format Command should be sent as  
occasion demands because they are not protected in memory.  
- 12 -  
(2) Where the Saved Data Call Command is used:  
Power ON  
[ESC] XQ: Calls the label format stored in the flash  
Place paper  
memory board.  
Saved Data Call Command  
Feed Command  
[ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it with  
the first printing position.  
[ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.  
[ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.  
[ESC] RB: Draws bar code data.  
[ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.  
Bit Map Font Data Command  
Outline Font Data Command  
Bar Code Data Command  
Issue Command  
Yes  
<Change data issue>  
No  
Yes  
<Label change>  
No  
Power OFF  
NOTES: (1) When placing new paper, the Feed Command must always be sent. When using the  
same paper after the power is turned off and on, the Feed Command may be omitted.  
(2) If the option for “automatic call at power on” for the Saved Data Call Command has  
previously been selected, the Saved Data Call Command may be omitted after the  
power is turned off and on.  
- 13 -  
6. INTERFACE COMMANDS  
6.1 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS  
(1) Format of Interface command  
ESC  
Command & Data  
LF NUL  
The length from [ESC] to [LF] [NUL] must be as specified by each command.  
There are the following three kinds of control codes:  
ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL(00H)  
{
(7BH), | (7CH), }  
(7DH)  
(2) How to use reference  
Function  
Format  
Describes the outline of the function of the command.  
Shows the format of the command.  
The format designation method should conform to the following rules:  
Each set of small letters (such as aa, bbbb) indicates a parameter item.  
An item enclosed in parentheses may be omitted.  
“…” indicates the repetition of an item.  
Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be transmitted  
in practice.  
Other symbols must always be inserted at the designated positions before being  
transmitted.  
Term  
Explains the term(s) used in the format.  
“0 to 999” described in the entry range indicates that up to 3-digit variable-length  
entry is allowed. (Entry of “001” or “009” is also possible.) “000 to 999” indicates  
that entry must be fixed as 3 digits.  
Explanation  
Note  
Explains the command in detail.  
Supplementary explanation of the command.  
Related commands  
Refer to  
Examples  
Explains the command examples.  
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]  
The above corresponds to the transfer of the following:  
1B 54 32 30 43 33 30 0A 00  
[ESC]  
T
2
0
C
3
0 [LF] [NUL]  
(3) Precautions  
The commands and parameters described in this specification must always be used. If any  
command or parameter other than those covered in this specification is used, the printer  
operation will not be guaranteed. The commands must be used in the online mode. If any  
command is transmitted in system mode, the printer will not operate. However, only the Reset  
Command can be used.  
- 14 -  
NOTES:  
1. If a command is not recognized as a command, it is ignored.  
e.g.) [ESC] H, [ESC]AA, and so on.  
2. If the number of digits of the parameter is specified, when the number of in put digits does not  
match the specified number of digits, a command error occurs.  
3. When a parameter is set to any character/value other than specified characters/values, a  
command error occurs.  
e.g.) In the case that a value should be set for parameter, “0001” is acceptable, however, “000A”  
results in an error.  
In the case that a character should be set for parameter, “A” is acceptable, however, “1” results in  
an error.  
4. If the value range of the parameter is specified, when any value beyond the range is entered, a  
command error occurs. (Except for the D command)  
5. When a parameter is missing, which cannot be omitted, a command error occurs.  
6. The parameter should be set to either a value or a character, even if the parameter is defined as  
“Ignore”.  
e.g.) a : Ignore  
If it is omitted, a command error occurs, except when the parameter is omissible.  
If the number of digits of the parameter is specified, when the number of input digits does not  
match the specified number of digits, a command error occurs.  
7. When any value/character other than available values/characters for the parameter function is set,  
a command error occurs.  
e.g.) Parameter “e” for the LC command.  
e: Type of line  
0: Line  
1: Rectangle  
If “2” is set to parameter “e”, a command error occurs.  
8. About D command  
1) Parameter “aaaa”, “bbbb” and “cccc”  
When any value lager than maximum value is entered for these three parameters, the entered  
value is internally changed to the maximum value.  
When any value smaller than minimum value is entered for these tree parameters, the entered  
value is internally changed to the minimum value.  
2) When “aaaa” is smaller than “cccc”, a command error occurs.  
3) When “aaaa – cccc < 2mm”, it is internally changed to “cccc = aaaa – 2mm”.  
- 15 -  
6.2 LIST OF COMMANDS  
(1) Commands related to setting  
Label Size Set Command  
[ESC] D......................................17  
(2) Commands related to fine adjustment  
Position Fine Adjust Command  
Print Density Fine Adjust Command  
[ESC] AX....................................22  
[ESC] AY....................................27  
(3) Commands related to clear  
Image Buffer Clear Command  
Clear Area Command  
[ESC] C......................................28  
[ESC] XR ...................................29  
(4) Commands related to drawing format setting  
Line Format Command  
[ESC] LC....................................31  
[ESC] PC ...................................35  
[ESC] PV....................................49  
[ESC] XB....................................63  
Bit Map Font Format Command  
Outline Font Format Command  
Bar Code Format Command  
(5) Commands related to print data  
Bit Map Font Data Command  
Outline Font Data Command  
Bar Code Data Command  
[ESC] RC ...................................94  
[ESC] RV ...................................97  
[ESC] RB .................................100  
(6) Commands related to issue and feed  
Issue Command  
Feed Command  
Eject Command  
[ESC] XS..................................113  
[ESC] T ....................................123  
[ESC] IB...................................128  
[ESC] U1, [ESC] U2.................129  
Forward/Reverse Feed Command (Reserved for future)  
(7) Commands related to writable characters  
Storage Area Allocate Command  
Memory Card Format Command  
2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command  
Bit Map Writable Character Command  
[ESC] XF..................................131  
[ESC] J1...................................133  
[ESC] XE..................................134  
[ESC] XD .................................135  
(8) Commands related to graphics  
Graphic Command  
[ESC] SG .................................146  
(9) Commands related to PC command saving  
Memory Card Format Command  
Save Start Command  
Save Terminate Command  
Saved Data Call Command  
[ESC] J1...................................133  
[ESC] XO .................................154  
[ESC] XP..................................156  
[ESC] XQ .................................157  
(10) Commands related to control  
Reset Command  
Batch Reset Command  
[ESC] WR ................................158  
[ESC] Z0 ..................................172  
(11) Commands related to status  
Status Request Command  
Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command  
Version Information Acquire Command  
[ESC] WS ................................159  
[ESC] WB ................................160  
[ESC] WV, [ESC] WI ...............162  
(12) Commands related to printer information  
Information Store Command  
Information Request Command  
[ESC] IG...................................165  
[ESC] IR.................................. 166  
(13) Commands related to parameter setting  
Parameter Set Command  
Fine Adjustment Value Set Command  
[ESC] Z2;1 ...............................167  
[ESC] Z2;2 .............................. 170  
- 16 -  
6.3 COMMANDS FOR CREATING APPLICATION  
6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND  
[ESC] D  
Function  
Format  
Term  
Sets the size of a label or tag.  
[ESC] Daaaa, bbbb, cccc (,dddd) [LF] [NUL]  
aaaa:  
Pitch length of the label or tag  
4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
4 digits: Max. 6096(609.6 mm)  
5 digits: Max. 06096 (609.6 mm)  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
Effective print width  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Effective print length  
4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
4 digits: Max. 6096 (609.6 mm)  
5 digits: Max. 06096 (609.6 mm)  
dddd:  
(Omissible) Function: Ignore  
Explanation  
[Labels]  
Backing paper  
Label  
Backing paper  
Label  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Label  
Label  
pitch  
pitch  
Effective  
Effective  
print length  
print length  
X
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
0
Effective  
print width  
Effective  
print width  
Y
Y
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]  
[Printing direction: Printing top first]  
- 17 -  
[Tags]  
Black mark  
(Back side of print)  
Black mark  
(Back side of print)  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Tag  
Tag  
Tag  
pitch  
Tag  
pitch  
Effective  
print length  
Effective  
print length  
X
0
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Effective  
print width  
Effective  
print width  
Y
Y
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]  
[Printing direction: Printing top first]  
[Setting range]  
Black mark  
(Back side  
of print)  
I
Stop  
I
Stop  
position  
position  
Tag  
Cut  
position  
E
B
Cut  
position  
F
Origin  
Origin  
A
A
H
H
Origin  
Origin  
G
D
C
G
C
Paper feed direction  
[Labels]  
[Tags]  
- 18 -  
[mm]  
Model  
B-SV4D  
Strip  
Item  
Method  
Batch  
10.0  
Cutter  
15.0  
Thermal head dot density  
Thermal head width  
A: Label pitch  
Tag pitch  
8 dots/mm  
108  
Min.  
25.4  
Label  
Max.  
Min.  
609.6  
10.0  
10.0  
15.0  
15.0  
Tag  
Max.  
Min.  
609.6  
25.4  
B: Label length  
Max.  
607.6  
25.4  
112  
C: Backing paper width Min.  
Tag width  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
D: Label width  
22.4  
109  
E: Label-to-label gap  
F: Black mark length  
2.0  
2.0  
6.0  
6.0  
10.0  
10.0  
13  
G: Effective print width Min.  
Max.  
108 ± 0.2  
H: Effective  
print length  
Min.  
8.0  
23.4  
13.0  
Label  
Tag  
Max.  
Min.  
607.6  
8.0  
13.0  
Max.  
607.6  
607.6  
I: Slow up interval  
1.0  
- 19 -  
Notes  
(1) Before changing the label size or type of sensor, the Label Size Set Command  
must first be transmitted.  
(2) The Label Size Set Command is protected in memory (even if the power is turned  
off).  
(3) After sending the Label Size Set Command, one sheet of paper must be fed by the  
Feed Command ([ESC] T) and must be aligned with the first print position prior to  
printing.  
(4) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (head position at stop), and  
cut position are determined according to the parameters of the Label Size Set  
Command as shown in the figure on the preceding page. For the print stop  
position in strip issue mode, refer to the section of the Position Fine Adjust  
Command. The effective print area is centered on the label/tag.  
(5) Printing cannot be performed in the slow up (1 mm) and slow down (1 mm) areas.  
Consequently, [A : label/tag pitch] - [H: effective print length] 2 mm must be  
assumed.  
(6) The origin of drawing coordinates, print stop position (head position at stop), and  
cut position are adjustable by the Fine Adjust Commands and according to the fine  
adjustment settings in System mode.  
(7) The tag rotation designation of the Issue Command ([ESC] XS) causes the origin  
of drawing coordinates to be origin in the case of “printing bottom first” and to be  
origin in the case of “printing top first”, as shown in the figure.  
(8) The parameters must be as shown in the figure and table. Any value or paper  
outside the range results in a failure of printing or an error.  
(9) The setting for the backing paper width is used for the control of the backing paper  
rewind motor for a strip issue. Therefore, this setting is not effective for any mode  
other than strip issue mode.  
- 20 -  
Examples  
(1) Labels  
(2) Tags  
Effective  
print area  
Black mark  
(Back side  
of print)  
Label  
76.2  
mm  
50.8  
mm  
46.8  
mm  
72.2  
mm  
Effective  
print area  
Tag  
76.0 mm  
Backing paper  
82.0 mm  
99.6 mm  
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468, 0820 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] D0762, 0996, 0722 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] T10C30 [LF] [NUL]  
- 21 -  
6.3.2 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND  
[ESC] AX  
Function  
Adjusts the feed value so that the label will be shifted forward or backward from the  
automatically set first print start position.  
Adjusts the cut position so that the label will be cut at a position shifted forward or  
backward from the automatically set cut position, or adjusts the strip position so that  
the label will be shifted forward or backward from the automatically set strip position.  
Adjusts the value for feeding the label back to the home position after cutting, or  
adjusts the value for feeding the label back to the home position after stripping.  
Format  
Term  
[ESC] AX; abbb, cddd, eff [LF] [NUL]  
a:  
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to  
be made.  
+: Backward  
-: Forward  
bbb:  
c:  
Feed value to be finely adjusted.  
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)  
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a cut position  
(or strip position) fine adjustment is to be made.  
+: Backward  
-: Forward  
If cutter and strip module is not installed, this value is ignored.  
ddd:  
e:  
Amount for finely adjusting the cut position (or strip position).  
000 to 350 (in 0.1 mm units)  
If cutter and strip module is not installed, this value is ignored.  
Indicates whether the back feed is to be increased or decreased.  
+: Increase  
-: Decrease  
ff:  
Amount for finely adjusting the back feed.  
00 to 99 (in 0.1 mm units)  
- 22 -  
Explanation  
[Feed Length Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the feed for shifting backward or forward)  
0.0 mm  
One label  
First print position  
+3.0 mm  
One label  
First print position  
-3.0 mm  
One label  
First print position  
Paper feed direction  
[Cut Position Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the cut position for shifting backward or  
forward)  
0.0 mm  
Cut position  
+3.0 mm  
Cut position  
- 3.0 mm  
Cut position  
Paper feed direction  
- 23 -  
[Strip Position Fine Adjustment]  
0.0 mm  
+3.0 mm  
-3.0 mm  
Printing in strip issue mode is stopped at the position where the  
distance from the middle point of the label-to-label gap to the  
end of the strip shaft is 3 mm, since the label-to-label gap is  
assumed to be 2 mm.  
3 mm  
2 mm  
When the print stop position is not proper, the print stop position  
should be adjusted using the strip position fine adjust function.  
When the label-to-label gap is 5 mm or more, the effective print  
length should be set to the maximum (label pitch -2 mm). Then,  
the print stop position should be adjusted using the strip position  
fine adjust function.  
2 mm  
[Back Feed Fine Adjustment] (To finely adjust the back feed for shifting backward or forward)  
0.0 mm  
First print position (home position after back feed)  
+3.0 mm  
First print position (home position after back feed)  
- 3.0 mm  
First print position (home position after back feed)  
Paper feed direction  
- 24 -  
Notes  
(1) If the feed value fine adjustment, cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment or  
back feed value fine adjustment has been set in system mode (key operation on  
the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the fine adjustment in system mode.  
The max. fine adjustment values are as follows. However, the max. feed fine  
adjustment value is limited within the label pitch.  
Feed value fine adjustment...................................................±50.0 mm  
Cut position (or strip position) fine adjustment......................±35.0 mm  
Back feed value fine adjustment...........................................±9.9 mm  
(2) After changing the fine adjustment value by this command, one label must be fed  
by the Feed Command ([ESC] T) to adjust the first print position.  
(3) Each fine adjustment value is protected in memory (even if the power is turned  
off).  
(4) If a fine adjustment value is improper, printing will not be performed correctly.  
For example, if the back feed fine adjustment value is not set properly,  
the print positions without cutting and after cutting will be different from  
each other. If the label is fed back excessively, the paper will not be fed  
correctly during printing.  
In the strip issue mode, the print position may differ between the first  
label and the second label. The back feed fine adjustment is used to  
adjust the length so that the label is correctly fed back to the position  
placed before the forward feed is performed.  
(5) The cut position (or the strip position) fine adjustment and back feed value fine  
adjustment are effective only when the printer is in cut issue or strip issue mode.  
- 25 -  
Examples  
(1) Cut issue  
3.5 mm  
Cut  
Preprinted  
2.0 mm  
2.0 mm  
Finely adjust the print  
position by +2.0 mm.  
Finely adjust the cut  
position by +3.5 mm.  
Finely adjust the back  
feed value by +1.0 mm.  
(3.0 - 2.0 = 1.0)  
3.0 mm  
Cut  
Paper feed  
direction  
[ESC] AX; +020, +035, +10 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] T21C30 [LF] [NUL]  
(2) Strip issue  
1.0 mm  
3.0 mm  
Finely adjust the strip  
position by +2.0 mm.  
Finely adjust the print  
position by +1.0 mm.  
A B C  
A B C  
1.0 mm  
[ESC] AX; +010, +020, +00 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] T20D30 [LF] [NUL]  
Paper feed  
direction  
- 26 -  
6.3.3 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND  
[ESC] AY  
Function  
Format  
Term  
Adjusts the automatically set print density.  
[ESC] AY; abb, c [LF] [NUL]  
a:  
Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density.  
+: Increase (darker)  
-: Decrease (lighter)  
bb:  
c:  
Print density fine adjustment value  
00 to 10 (in units of 1 step)  
Indicates the mode for fine adjustment, thermal transfer or direct thermal.  
1: Direct thermal  
Explanation  
(1) The print density fine adjustment is performed by adjusting the time that voltage is  
applied to the thermal head.  
(2) If the print density fine adjustment value has been set in system mode (key  
operation on the printer), the fine adjustment value will be the sum of the fine  
adjustment by this command and the fine adjustment in system mode. The max.  
fine adjustment values for thermal transfer/direct thermal print modes are each  
±10.  
(3) The fine adjustment values in thermal transfer print mode and direct thermal print  
mode can be set independently.  
(4) The Print Density Fine Adjust Command is protected in memory (even if the power  
is turned off).  
(5) The fine adjustment value for both the fine adjust command and the system mode  
fine adjustment is 00 at shipment from the factory.  
Notes  
Even if the print density is set to the value of +08 to +10, it will be automatically  
converted to +07 in order to protect the thermal head.  
Examples  
To set the density in thermal transfer print mode to -2.  
[ESC] AY; -02, 0 [LF] [NUL]  
To set the density in direct thermal print mode to +3.  
[ESC] AY; +03, 1 [LF] [NUL]  
- 27 -  
6.3.4 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND  
[ESC] C  
Function  
Format  
Clears the image buffer for drawing characters, lines, bar codes, and graphics.  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
Explanation  
(1) After changing the label size, the image buffer must be cleared.  
(2) The increment/decrement designation (described later) is valid until the Image  
Buffer Clear Command is transmitted.  
(3) The link field designation (described later) is effective until the Image Buffer Clear  
Command is sent.  
Examples  
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] T20C51 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 28 -  
6.3.5 CLEAR AREA COMMAND  
[ESC] XR  
Function  
Clears the designated area or reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated  
area in the drawing area.  
Format  
Term  
[ESC] XR; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e [LF] [NUL]  
aaaa:  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
dddd:  
e:  
Designated area start point X-coordinate  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Designated area start point Y-coordinate  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Designated area end point X-coordinate  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Designated area end point Y-coordinate  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of clear  
A: Clears the contents in the designated area to zeros.  
B: Reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated area.  
Explanation  
Backing paper  
Label  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Label  
End point  
Start point  
Effective  
Effective  
print length  
print length  
Start point  
End point  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Effective  
Effective  
X
print width  
print width  
0
Y
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]  
[Print direction: Printing top first]  
Notes  
(1) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.  
(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are set to an  
upper right and a lower left points, respectively.  
(3) The start and end coordinates of the designated area must be set within the  
effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).  
- 29 -  
[Effective print area]  
[mm]  
Model  
B-SV4D  
Strip  
Item  
Method  
Batch  
8.0  
Cutter  
13.0  
Effective print width  
Min.  
13.0  
Max.  
108 ± 0.2  
Effective  
print length  
Min.  
23.4  
Label  
Max.  
Min.  
607.6  
8.0  
Tag  
13.0  
Max.  
607.6  
607.6  
Examples  
Start point of  
designated area  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
10.0 mm  
58.5 mm  
Designated area  
End point of designated area  
34.5 mm  
76.2 mm  
[ESC] XR; 0345, 0100, 0762, 0585, A [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 30 -  
6.3.6 LINE FORMAT COMMAND  
[ESC] LC  
Function  
Format  
Term  
Sets the line format and draws the line.  
[ESC] LC; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, f (, ggg) [LF] [NUL]  
aaaa:  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
dddd:  
e:  
Start point X-coordinate  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Start point Y-coordinate  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
End point X-coordinate  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
End point Y-coordinate  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of line  
0: Line (horizontal, vertical, slant)  
1: Rectangle  
f:  
No. of line width dots  
1 to 9 (in 0.1 mm units)  
ggg:  
Radius of rounded corners of rectangles  
(Omissible. If omitted, the chamfering process for rectangle corners is not  
performed.)  
Fixed as 3 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Explanation  
Backing paper  
Label  
Backing paper  
Label  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Start point  
End  
point  
Effective  
print length  
Effective  
print length  
Start  
point  
End  
point  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Effective  
print width  
Effective  
print width  
X
0
Y
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]  
[Print direction: Printing top first]  
- 31 -  
[Line]  
(1) Horizontal line (In the case of |Y2 - Y1| = 0)  
(X1,Y1)  
(X2,Y2)  
Line width  
(2) Vertical line (In the case of |X2 - X1| = 0)  
(X1,Y1)  
(X2,Y2)  
Line width  
(3) Slant line A ( |X2 - X1| |Y2 - Y1| )  
(4) Slant line B ( |X2 - X1| > |Y2 - Y1| )  
(X1,Y1)  
(X1,Y1)  
(X1,Y1)  
Line width  
(X2,Y2)  
(X2,Y2)  
(X1,Y1)  
Line width  
(X2,Y2)  
(X2,Y2)  
Line width  
Line width  
- 32 -  
[Rectangle]  
(1) Radius of rounded corners = 000 or parameter omitted  
(X1,Y1)  
(X2,Y2)  
Line width  
Line width  
(X2,Y2)  
(X1,Y1)  
Line width  
Line width  
(2) Radius of rounded corners 000  
(X1,Y1)  
Line width  
Radius  
(X2,Y2)  
Line width  
Notes  
(1) In line designation, a horizontal line, vertical line, or slant line A/B is drawn  
according to the start and end point coordinates.  
(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.  
(3) The start and end point coordinates must be set so that the result of line drawing  
will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC]  
D).  
- 33 -  
(4) Programming the radius of the rounded corner is effective only when the type of  
line is 1 (rectangle). When the type of line is 0, designation of the radius is  
ignored.  
When the type of line is 1, and the radius of the rounded corner is 000 or omitted,  
a rectangle is printed.  
(5) A circle is assumed when:  
| X2 - X1 |  
2
| Y2 - Y1 |  
2
=
[Radius of rounded corners]  
[Effective print area]  
[mm]  
Model  
B-SV4D  
Strip  
Item  
Method  
Batch  
Cutter  
13.0  
Effective print width  
Min.  
13.0  
Max.  
108 ± 0.2  
Effective  
print length  
Min.  
8.0  
23.4  
Label  
Max.  
Min.  
607.6  
8.0  
Tag  
13.0  
Max.  
607.6  
607.6  
Examples  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
5.0 mm  
28.0 mm  
0.4 mm  
0.4 mm  
20.0 mm  
30.5 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] LC; 0200, 0350, 0305, 0050, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] LC; 0200, 0050, 0200, 0280, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 34 -  
6.3.7 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND  
[ESC] PC  
Function  
Format  
Sets the format indicating on the label at which the bit map font is to be printed and how  
it is to be printed.  
[ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)  
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (=rrr------rrr) [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)  
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (; ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20) [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aaa:  
Character string number  
000 to 199 (two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable)  
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of character string  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of character string  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
d:  
Character horizontal magnification  
1 to 9 (in magnifications)  
* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units  
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).  
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.  
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).  
d d  
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)  
Designation in magnifications  
Character vertical magnification  
1 to 9 (in magnifications)  
: 0 to 9  
e:  
* Two digit designation enables magnifications in 0.5 units  
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications).  
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.  
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).  
e e  
Designation in 0.5 magnification units : 0 or 5 (5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)  
Designation in magnifications  
: 0 to 9  
ff:  
Type of font  
E: Times Roman  
J: Helvetica  
(Bold)  
14 point  
(Bold)  
12 point  
18 point  
9.5 point  
7 point  
M: Presentation  
N: Letter Gothic  
O: Prestige Elite  
Q: Courier  
(Bold)  
(Medium)  
(Medium)  
(Medium)  
10 point  
U: Kanji (16×16 dots)/Writable character (16×16 dots) (Square Gothic)  
V: Kanji (24×24 dots)/Writable character (24×24 dots) (Square Gothic)  
W:Kanji (32×32 dots)/Writable character (32×32 dots) (Square Gothic)  
X: Kanji (48×48 dots)/Writable character (48×48 dots) (Square Gothic)  
For the JA  
model only  
- 35 -  
01 (a): Writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)  
to  
40 (a): Writable character 40 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)  
51 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 1 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)  
to  
55 (a): 2-byte code set writable character 5 (1×1 dot to 720×720 dots)  
a: Drive  
(Omissible. If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)  
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board  
1:Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
2:Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
*
The following fonts are proportional: E, J  
ghh:  
Fine adjustment of character-to-character space  
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)  
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character  
space.  
+: Increase  
-: Decrease  
hh: No. of space dots between characters  
00 to 99 (in dots)  
ii:  
j:  
Rotational angles of a character and character string  
00:  
11:  
0° (char.)  
90° (char.)  
0° (char.-string)  
90° (char.-string)  
180° (char.-string)  
270° (char.-string)  
22: 180° (char.)  
33: 270° (char.)  
Character attribution  
B:  
Black character  
W (aabb): Reverse character  
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black  
background in the horizontal direction  
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black  
background in the vertical direction  
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
F (aabb): Boxed character  
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the  
horizontal direction  
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical  
direction  
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
C (aa):  
Stroked out character  
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke  
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.  
(If omitted, it is character magnification (the larger one of horizontal or  
vertical magnifications) × 6 dots.)  
- 36 -  
Jkkll:  
kk:  
Bold character designation  
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed.)  
No. of horizontal shift dots  
00 to 16 (in dots)  
ll:  
No. of vertical shift dots  
00 to 16 (in dots)  
Mm:  
Type of check digits to be attached.  
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed)  
m: Type of check digit  
0: Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)  
1: Modulus 43 (Draws data and check digit)  
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit)  
noooooooooo: Increment and decrement  
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)  
n: Designates whether to increment or decrement.  
+: Increment  
-: Decrement  
oooooooooo: Skip value  
0000000000 to 9999999999  
Zpp:  
Pq:  
Zero suppression  
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)  
pp: No. of zeros to be suppressed  
00 to 20  
Alignment (Omissible, If omitted, the alignment is set to left.)  
q: Designates the character position  
1: Left  
2: Center  
3: Right  
4aaaa: Equal space  
aaaa: X direction of character string area  
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)  
bbb: Line feed length  
010 to 500 (in 1 mm units)  
cc:  
Number of lines  
01 to 99  
rrr------rrr: Data string to be printed (Omissible)  
Max. 255 digits  
ss1, ss2, ss3, ------, ss20: Link field No. (Omissible)  
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)  
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.  
- 37 -  
Explanation  
(1) Character string number  
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RC), the format designated by the  
character string number is selected.  
(2) Print origin of coordinates  
Backing paper  
Backing paper  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Label  
Label  
Sam ple  
Effective  
Effective  
Print origin  
of coordinates  
print length  
print length  
Print origin  
of coordinates  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Effective print  
width  
Effective print  
width  
Y
X
0
0
X
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
Y
[Printing direction: Printing bottom first]  
[Printing direction: Printing top first]  
The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of character drawing will be within  
the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).  
- 38 -  
[Effective print area]  
[mm]  
Model  
B-SV4D  
Strip  
Item  
Method  
Batch  
8.0  
Cutter  
13.0  
Effective print width  
Min.  
13.0  
Max.  
108 ± 0.2  
Effective  
print length  
Min.  
23.4  
Label  
Max.  
Min.  
607.6  
8.0  
Tag  
13.0  
Max.  
607.6  
607.6  
(3) Horizontal magnification and vertical magnification  
Vertical  
Horizontal  
magnification  
magnification  
Horizontal  
magnification  
Vertical  
magnification  
- 39 -  
[Relationship between drawing coordinates and magnification]  
Char. height ×  
Vertical  
magnification  
Char.  
height  
Enlarge  
Point of  
origin  
Char. width  
Char. Width ×  
Horizontal magnification  
Left offset  
Point of  
origin of  
next char.  
Point of  
origin  
Point of  
origin of  
next char.  
Horizontal spacing/  
proportional spacing  
(Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing)  
× Horizontal magnification  
(4) Type of font  
Times Roman  
Helvetica  
Presentation  
Letter Gothic  
Prestige Elite  
Courier  
- 40 -  
(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space  
If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots between  
characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal spacing/proportional  
spacing determined for each character. If character-to-character space is specified,  
drawing will take place according to the value obtained by adding the character  
spacing/proportional spacing to the specified value.  
Point of  
origin  
Point of origin of  
next char.  
No. of fine adjust space dots  
between characters  
(Horizontal spacing/proportional  
spacing) × Horizontal magnification  
(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string  
Sam ple  
Origin  
0° (00)  
90° (11)  
180° (22)  
270° (33)  
(7) Selection of character attribution  
No. of dots in the  
horizontal direction  
No. of dots in the  
vertical direction  
A B  
A B  
Black characters  
Reverse characters  
No. of dots in the  
No. of dots in the  
horizontal direction  
horizontal direction  
No. of dots in the  
vertical direction  
A B  
A B  
Boxed characters  
Stroked out characters  
- 41 -  
(8) Bold character designation  
0°  
90°  
Horizontally  
bold  
Vertically  
bold  
Vertically/  
horizontally  
bold  
Horizontally  
bold  
Vertically  
bold  
Vertically/  
horizontally  
bold  
(9) Check digit to be attached  
When Modulus 10 or Modulus 43 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated  
and attached to the data row for drawing.  
When DBP Modulus 10 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated and only the  
check digit is drawn. When the data includes any data other than the numerals, drawing is  
not performed.  
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.  
(10) Increment/decrement  
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is  
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row  
will not be drawn.  
When the font type is 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55, the  
incrementing/decrementing cannot be designated. (If it is designated, it is ignored, and  
the printer operates as if there was no designation.)  
Initial value  
INC/DEC  
0000  
0000  
+10  
0000  
+10  
0000  
+10  
999999  
+1  
+10  
Not  
designated  
Zero suppression  
5
3
0
3
1st label  
2nd label  
3rd label  
4th label  
5th label  
0000  
0010  
0020  
0030  
0040  
0000  
0010  
0020  
0030  
0040  
000  
010  
020  
030  
040  
0000  
0010  
0020  
0030  
0040  
999999  
000  
001  
002  
003  
- 42 -  
Letters and numerals for increment/decrement  
For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are  
possible.  
Only the numerals are picked up and calculated for  
incrementing/decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the  
data.  
Example of increment/decrement calculation  
Initial value  
INC/DEC  
00000  
+1  
A0A0A  
+1  
7A8/9  
+3  
A2A0A  
-3  
1st label  
2nd label  
3rd label  
4th label  
5th label  
00000  
00001  
00002  
00003  
00004  
A0A0A  
A0A1A  
A0A2A  
A0A3A  
A0A4A  
7A8/9  
7A9/2  
7A9/5  
7A9/8  
8A0/1  
A2A0A  
A1A7A  
A1A4A  
A1A1A  
A0A8A  
(11) Zero suppression  
0
1
2
2
3
4
5
No. of zeros to be suppressed  
Data  
Print  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0000  
00  
0A12  
A12  
0123  
0123  
0123  
0123  
0
123 0123  
The leading zero(s) in a data row is replaced by a space(s) according to the designated  
number of digits. However, if the number of digits to be suppressed is greater than the data  
row, the data row will be drawn without zero suppression. Where the data row exceeds the  
maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn. When the font type is 51, 52,  
53, 54 or 55, zero suppression is not designated. If it is designated, it is ignored, and the printer  
operates as if there was no designation.  
(12) Alignment  
No. of dots of character string  
area in the X direction  
Designated origin  
Left  
Center  
Right  
E q u a l s p a c e  
Automatic line feed  
Automatic line feed  
Automatic  
Line feed length  
No. of lines  
If characters are not placed on one line when equal space and automatic line feed is  
designated, the following steps should be performed.  
Decrease the value of the character-to-character space. When characters are not placed  
on one line if the value is set to 0, return the value to its default, and then reduce the  
horizontal magnification for a character by 0.5.  
If characters are still not placed on one line, repeatedly decrease the value of the  
character-to-character space, and then reduce the horizontal magnification. When  
characters are not placed on one line if the character magnification is set to 0.5 and the  
character-to-character space is set to 0, the field is not drawn. (The same previous field is  
also not drawn.)  
- 43 -  
(13) Data string to be printed  
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol  
“=.” Up to 255 digits can be printed. If the number of digits exceeds 255, the excessive  
data will be discarded.  
For the character code table, refer to the character code table mentioned later.  
(14) Link field No.  
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;”. After the link  
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link  
Field Data Command to draw an image.  
Up to 20 fields can be linked.  
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.  
[Format Command]  
[ESC] PC01;................... ; 01 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC02;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC03;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]  
: Link field No. 1 is designated.  
: Link field No. 3 is designated.  
: Link field No. 4 is designated.  
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are  
designated.  
[ESC] PC04;................... ; 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC05;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC06;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]  
: Link field No. 2 is designated.  
: Link field No. 3 is designated.  
: Link field No. 4 is designated.  
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are  
designated.  
Designating link field No.  
[Data Command]  
[ESC] RC; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]  
Link field No. 4  
Link field No. 3  
Link field No. 2  
Link field No. 1  
A
B
ABCD  
001  
ABCD  
001  
*ABCD001*  
*ABCD001*  
- 44 -  
Notes  
(1)  
The check digit attach, increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are  
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper,  
no drawing will take place.  
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero  
suppression but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be  
calculated.  
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit  
(2)  
Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be  
drawn. If the total of bit map font, outline font or bar code increment/decrement  
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any  
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is incremented or  
decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.  
[Example]  
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 001 (+1))  
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 002)  
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 003 (+2))  
4) Image Buffer Clear Command  
5) Data Command (Character string No. 001 “0001”)  
6) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “AB-”)  
7) Data Command (Character string No. 003 “0100”)  
8) Issue Command (2 labels)  
0001  
AB - 0100  
0002  
AB - 0102  
9) Issue Command (1 label)  
0003  
AB - 0104  
10) Image Buffer Clear Command  
11) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “00000”)  
12) Issue Command (1 label)  
00000  
- 45 -  
(3) The Bit Map Font Format Command may be connected to the Outline Font Format  
Command when transmitted.  
[ESC] P C001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]  
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]  
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]  
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the  
drawing data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character  
string number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character  
string number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.  
Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command  
([ESC] C) and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the  
same character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data  
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields  
with the same character string number are automatically cleared until the Clear  
Command is sent.)  
(5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the  
same character string No. and reformatting data.  
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear  
Command.  
(6) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.  
(7) The same character string number cannot be programmed more than once in one  
format (one page).  
Refer to  
Bit Map Font Data Command ([ESC] RC)  
Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)  
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)  
- 46 -  
Examples  
(1)  
Origin (0, 0)  
12.5  
mm  
Effective print area  
30.0  
mm  
S a m p l e  
A B C D  
55.0  
mm  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, A, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 47 -  
(2)  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
30.0  
mm  
55.0  
mm  
S 0 0 1  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 48 -  
6.3.8 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND  
[ESC] PV  
Function  
Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the outline font is to be  
printed and how it is to be printed.  
Fonts other than TrueType font  
Format  
Term  
[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)  
(, Znn) (, Po) (=ppp------ppp) [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)  
(, Znn) (, Po) (; qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20) [LF] [NUL]  
aa:  
Character string number  
00 to 99  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
dddd:  
eeee:  
f:  
Print origin of X-coordinate of the character string  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the character string  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Character width  
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)  
Height of the character  
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of font  
A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold])  
B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold] proportional)  
ghhh:  
Fine adjustment of character-to-character space  
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)  
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character  
space.  
+: Increase  
-: Decrease  
hhh: No. of space dots between characters  
000 to 512 (in dots)  
ii:  
Rotational angles of a character and character string  
00:  
11:  
0° (char.)  
0° (char.-string)  
90° (char.-string)  
180° (char.-string)  
270° (char.-string)  
90° (char.)  
22: 180° (char.)  
33: 270° (char.)  
- 49 -  
j:  
Character attribution  
B:  
Black character  
W (aabb): Reverse character  
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black  
background in the horizontal direction.  
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black  
background in the vertical direction.  
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
F (aabb): Boxed character  
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the  
horizontal direction.  
bb: No. of dots from the character string area to the box in the vertical  
direction.  
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
C (aa):  
Stroked out character  
aa: No. of dots from the character string area to the end of the stroke  
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)  
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.  
(If omitted, it is character size (the larger character width or height) ÷ 8 dots.)  
Mk:  
Type of the check digit to be attached  
(Omissible. If omitted, the check digit is not drawn.)  
k: Type of check digit  
0: Modulus 10  
1: Modulus 43  
(Draws data and check digit)  
(Draws data and check digit)  
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws check digit only)  
lmmmmmmmmmm: Increment and decrement  
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not  
performed.)  
l: Designates whether to increment or decrement.  
+: Increment  
-: Decrement  
mmmmmmmmmm: Skip value  
0000000000 to 9999999999  
Znn:  
Zero suppression  
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)  
nn: No. of zeros to be suppressed  
00 to 20  
- 50 -  
Po:  
Alignment (Omissible. If omitted, the alignment is set to left.)  
o: Designates the character position.  
1: Left  
2: Center  
3: Right  
4aaaa: Equal space  
aaaa: X direction of character string area  
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)  
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)  
Max. 255 digits  
qq1, qq2, qq3, ------, qq20: Link field No. (Omissible)  
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)  
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.  
- 51 -  
TrueType font  
Format  
[ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, ff, g (, hiii), jj, k (,Lmm)(=ppp ------ ppp) [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa:  
Character string number  
00 to 99  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
dddd:  
eeee:  
ff:  
Print origin of X-coordinate of the character string  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the character string  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Character width  
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)  
Height of the character  
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of font  
01: BalloonPExtBol (File name: Ballp_eb.ttf)  
02: BlacklightD (File name: Blklt_rg.ttf)  
03: BrushScrD (File name: Brush_rg.ttf)  
04: CG Times (File name: Tec_cgt.ttf)  
05: CG Times Bold (File name: Tec_cgtb.ttf)  
06: CG Times Italic (File name: Tec_cgti.ttf)  
07: Clarendon Condensed Bold (File name: Tec_clcd.ttf)  
08: FlashPBol (File name: Flash_bd.ttf)  
09: Garamond Kursiv Halbfett (File name: Tec_gmkh.ttf)  
10: GoudyHeaP (File name: Gdyhp_rg.ttf)  
11: GilliesGotDBol (File name: Gilli_bd.ttf)  
12: GilliesGotLig (File name: Gilli_lt.ttf)  
13: NimbusSanNovTUltLigCon (File name: Nsnct_ul.ttf)  
14: Ryahd (File name: ryahd.ttf)  
15: Ryahd Bold (File name: ryahdbd.ttf)  
16: CG Triumvirate (File name: Trium.ttf)  
17: CG Triumvirate Condensed Bold (File name: Triumcb.ttf)  
18: Univers Medium (File name: Tec_uni.ttf)  
19: Univers Bold (File name: Tec_unib.ttf)  
20: Univers Medium Italic (File name: Tec_unii.ttf)  
21: add_on TrueType font 1 (File name: addttf01.ttf)  
22: add_on TrueType font 2 (File name: addttf02.ttf)  
23: add_on TrueType font 3 (File name: addttf0e.ttf)  
24: add_on TrueType font 4 (File name: addttf04.ttf)  
25: add_on TrueType font 5 (File name: addttf05.ttf)  
(*1) The font types 21 to 25 are the fonts that a user adds. These fonts can  
be used by specifying “addttf01.ttf” to “addttf05.ttf” for the file names and  
installing these in the memory board.  
(*2) For the fonts stored in flash ROM on the CPU board, parameter “ff” for  
the type of font corresponds to the font type according to the setting  
made when fonts are stored.  
- 52 -  
g:  
Drive  
Indicates where the TrueType font files are stored.  
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board  
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
hiiii:  
Fine adjustment of character-to-character space  
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)  
h: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character  
space.  
+: Increase  
-: Decrease  
iii: No. of space dots between characters  
000 to 512 (in dots)  
jj:  
k:  
Rotational angles of a character and character string  
00:  
11:  
0° (char.)  
0° (char.-string)  
90° (char.-string)  
180° (char.-string)  
270° (char.-string)  
90° (char.)  
(Reserved for future)  
22: 180° (char.)  
33: 270° (char.)  
Character attribution  
B: Black character  
Lmm: True Type font size (Omissible)  
Points (1/72 inch per point)  
ppp------ppp: Data string to be printed (Omissible)  
Max. 255 digits  
* TrueType fonts are not included in the standard character generator data. Therefore,  
they must be installed in flash ROM on the CPU board, or the memory board.  
For installation of TrueType font and details, refer to the TrueType Font Specification  
(TAA-1184).  
* If Arabic is selected as the character code, letters are written from right to left.  
Origin  
0° (00)  
90° (11)  
180° (22)  
270° (33)  
- 53 -  
Explanation  
(1) Character string number  
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RV), the format designated by the  
character string number is selected.  
(2) Print origin of coordinates  
Backing paper  
Label  
Backing  
paper  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Label  
Print origin of  
coordinates  
Sam ple  
Effective  
print length  
Effective  
print length  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Print origin of  
coordinates  
Effective  
Effective  
X
print width  
print width  
0
Y
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]  
[Print direction: Printing top first]  
• The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of character drawing will  
be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).  
(3) True Type Font Size  
To designate the font size and the unit is 1/72 inch per point.  
- 54 -  
[Effective print area]  
[mm]  
Model  
B-SV4D  
Strip  
Item  
Method  
Batch  
8.0  
Cutter  
13.0  
Effective print width  
Min.  
13.0  
Max.  
108 ± 0.2  
Effective  
print length  
Min.  
23.4  
Label  
Max.  
Min.  
607.6  
8.0  
Tag  
13.0  
Max.  
607.6  
607.6  
(4) Character width and character height  
Char.  
height  
Char.  
height  
Char.  
width  
Standard size  
(256 × 256 dots)  
Char. width  
Char.  
height  
Char.  
width  
- 55 -  
(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space  
If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots  
between characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal  
spacing/proportional spacing determined for each character. If character-to-  
character space is specified, drawing will take place according to the value  
obtained by adding the character spacing/proportional spacing to the specified  
value. When equal space is selected for the alignment, the character-to-character  
space setting is invalid.  
(The horizontal spacing/proportional spacing are  
increased or decreased depending on the character size.)  
A B C  
A B  
(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string  
Sam ple  
Origin  
0° (00)  
90° (11)  
180° (22)  
270° (33)  
(7) Selection of character attribution  
No. of dots in the  
horizontal direction  
No. of dots in the  
vertical direction  
A B  
A B  
Black characters  
Reverse characters  
No. of dots in the  
No. of dots in the  
horizontal direction  
horizontal direction  
No. of dots in the  
vertical direction  
A B  
A B  
Boxed characters  
Stroked out characters  
- 56 -  
(8) Increment/decrement  
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented each time a label is  
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row  
will not be drawn.  
Initial value  
INC/DEC  
0000  
0000  
+10  
0000  
+10  
0000  
+10  
999999  
+1  
+10  
Not  
designated  
Zero suppression  
5
3
0
3
1st label  
2nd label  
3rd label  
4th label  
5th label  
0000  
0010  
0020  
0030  
0040  
0000  
0010  
0020  
0030  
0040  
000  
010  
020  
030  
040  
0000  
0010  
0020  
0030  
0040  
999999  
000  
001  
002  
003  
Letters and numerals for increment/decrement  
For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals and symbols) are  
possible. Only the numerals are picked up and calculated for incrementing/  
decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the data.  
Example of increment/decrement calculation  
Initial value  
INC/DEC  
00000  
+1  
A0A0A  
+1  
7A8/9  
+3  
A2A0A  
-3  
1st label  
2nd label  
00000  
00001  
00002  
00003  
00004  
A0A0A  
A0A1A  
A0A2A  
A0A3A  
A0A4A  
7A8/9  
7A9/2  
7A9/5  
7A9/8  
8A0/1  
A2A0A  
A1A7A  
A1A4A  
A1A1A  
A0A8A  
3rd label  
4th label  
5th label  
(9) Data string to be printed  
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol  
“=.” Up to 255 digits can be printed. When the number of digits exceeds 255, the  
excessive data will be discarded.  
For the character code table, refer to the character code table mentioned later.  
- 57 -  
(10) Link field No.  
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link  
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are linked by the Link  
Field Data Command to draw an image.  
Up to 20 fields can be linked.  
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.  
[Format Command]  
[ESC] PV01;................... ; 01 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV02;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV03;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]  
: Link field No. 1 is designated.  
: Link field No. 3 is designated.  
: Link field No. 4 is designated.  
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are  
designated.  
[ESC] PV04;................... ; 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV05;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV06;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]  
: Link field No. 2 is designated.  
: Link field No. 3 is designated.  
: Link field No. 4 is designated.  
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are  
designated.  
Designating link field No.  
[Data Command]  
[ESC] RV; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]  
Link field No. 4  
Link field No. 3  
Link field No. 2  
Link field No. 1  
B
A
ABCD  
001  
ABC  
D
*ABCD001*  
*ABCD001*  
Notes  
(1) The check digit attach, increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are  
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper,  
no drawing will take place.  
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero suppression  
but the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.  
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit  
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be  
drawn. If the total of bit map font, outline font, or bar code increment/decrement  
fields exceeds 32, drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any  
excessive field. The field to be incremented or decremented is incremented or  
decremented until the Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.  
- 58 -  
[Examples]  
1) Format Command (Increment character string No. 01 (+1))  
2) Format Command (No incrementing for character string No. 02)  
3) Format Command (Increment character string No. 03 (+2))  
4) Image Buffer Clear Command  
5) Data Command (Character string No. 01 “0001”)  
6) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “AB-”)  
7) Data Command (Character string No. 03 “0100”)  
8) Issue Command (2 labels)  
0001  
AB-0100  
0002  
AB-0102  
9) Issue Command (1 label)  
0003  
AB-0104  
10) Image Buffer Clear Command  
11) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “00000”)  
12) Issue Command (1 label)  
00000  
(3) The Outline Font Format Command may be connected to the Bit Map Font Format  
Command when transmitted.  
[ESC] PC001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]  
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]  
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]  
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
- 59 -  
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the  
drawing data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the character  
string number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character  
string number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.  
Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command  
([ESC] C) and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the  
same character string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data  
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields  
with the same character string number are automatically cleared until the Clear  
Command is sent.)  
(5) When characters overlap due to the character-to-character space fine adjustment,  
the outline font is not painted properly. Program the fine adjust value so that  
characters will not overlap. Also, when drawings such as lines or characters are  
on the outline font drawing position, the outline font is not painted properly. For  
font types A and B, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other drawings  
do not overlap the area in which the outline font is to be drawn. For font types C,  
E, F and G, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other drawings do not  
overlap the area for the designated character width and height.  
(6) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the  
same character string No. and reformatting data.  
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear  
Command.  
(7) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.  
(8) The same character string number cannot be programmed more than once in one  
format (one page).  
Refer to  
Outline Font Data Command ([ESC] RV)  
Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)  
Bar Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)  
- 60 -  
Examples  
(1)  
Origin (0, 0)  
12.5  
mm  
Effective print area  
30.0  
mm  
S a m p l e  
A B C D  
55.0  
mm  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV00; 0200, 0300, 0080, 0080, B, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 61 -  
(2)  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
30.0  
mm  
55.0  
mm  
S 0 0 1  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RV; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000”; LF$; NUL$;  
- 62 -  
6.3.9 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND  
[ESC] XB  
Function  
Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the bar code is to be  
printed and how it is to be printed.  
In the case of WPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC,  
KIX CODE  
(WPC is the generic name for bar codes of JAN, EAN and UPC.)  
Format  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)  
(= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)  
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa:  
Bar code number  
00 to 31  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
d:  
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of bar code  
0: JAN8, EAN8  
5: JAN13, EAN13  
6: UPC-E  
7: EAN13 + 2 digits  
8: EAN13 + 5 digits  
9: CODE128 (with auto code selection)  
A: CODE128 (without auto code selection)  
C: CODE93  
G: UPC-E + 2 digits  
H: UPC-E + 5 digits  
I:  
EAN8 + 2 digits  
J: EAN8 + 5 digits  
K: UPC-A  
L: UPC-A + 2 digits  
M: UPC-A + 5 digits  
N: UCC/EAN128  
R: Customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)  
S: Highest priority customer bar code (Postal code for Japan)  
U: POSTNET (Postal code for U.S)  
V: RM4SCC (ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE)  
(Postal code for U.K)  
W: KIX CODE (Postal code for Belgium)  
- 63 -  
e:  
Type of check digit  
1: Without attaching check digit  
2: Check digit check  
WPC  
Modulus 10  
Modulus 47  
CODE93  
CODE128 PSEUDO 103  
3: Check digit auto attachment (1)  
WPC  
Modulus 10  
CODE93  
CODE128  
UCC/EAN128  
Modulus 47  
PSEUDO 103  
Modulus 10 + Modulus 103  
Customer code Special check digit  
POSTNET  
RM4SCC  
Special check digit  
Special check digit  
4: Check digit auto attachment (2)  
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits  
5: Check digit auto attachment (3)  
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits  
* For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, and RMC4SCC, only “3:  
Check digit auto attachment (1)” is effective.  
ff:  
k:  
1-module width  
01 to 15 (in dots)  
Rotational angle of bar code  
0: 0°  
1: 90°  
2: 180°  
3: 270°  
llll:  
Height of the bar code  
0001 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)  
For the Customer bar code, POSTNET, RMC4SCC, KIX CODE, the height of  
the long bar is specified.  
mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment/decrement  
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not performed.)  
m:  
Indicates whether to increment or decrement  
+: Increment  
-: Decrement  
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value  
0000000000 to 9999999999  
ooo:  
p:  
Length of WPC guard bar  
(Omissible. If omitted, the guard bar is not attached.)  
000 to 100 (in 0.1 mm units)  
Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars  
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)  
0: Non-print  
1: Print  
- 64 -  
qq:  
No. of zeros to be suppressed  
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)  
00 to 20  
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)  
Max. 126 digits. However, it varies depending on the type of bar code.  
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------. tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)  
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)  
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.  
* Omissible parameters (such as “Increment/decrement”, “Selection of print or non-print  
of numerals under bars” and “No. of zeros to be suppressed”) cannot be set when the  
postal code (Customer bar code, POSTNET, RM4SCC, KIX CODE) is selected.  
- 65 -  
In the case of MSI, Interleaved 2 of 5, CODE39, NW7, and Industrial 2 of 5  
Format  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)  
(=sss------sss) [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)  
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa:  
Bar code number  
00 to 31  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
d:  
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of bar code  
1: MSI  
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)  
3: CODE39 (standard)  
4: NW7  
B: CODE39 (full ASCII)  
O: Industrial 2 of 5  
e:  
Type of check digit  
1: Without attaching check digit  
2: Check digit check  
CODE39  
MSI  
Modulus 43  
IBM modulus 10  
Modulus 10  
ITF  
Industrial 2 of 5  
Modulus check character  
3: Check digit auto attachment (1)  
CODE39  
MSI  
Modulus 43  
IBM modulus 10  
Modulus 10  
ITF  
Industrial 2 of 5  
Modulus check character  
4: Check digit auto attachment (2)  
MSI  
ITF  
IBM modulus 10 + IBM modulus 10  
DBP Modulus 10  
5: Check digit auto attachment (3)  
MSI  
IBM modulus 11 + IBM modulus 10  
ff:  
Narrow bar width  
01 to 99 (in dots)  
gg:  
Narrow space width  
01 to 99 (in dots)  
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, an element-to-element space is designated.  
hh:  
Wide bar width  
01 to 99 (in dots)  
- 66 -  
ii:  
jj:  
k:  
Wide space width  
01 to 99 (in dots)  
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, the value is fixed to 00.  
Character-to-character space width  
01 to 99 (in dots)  
* In the case of MSI and ITF, character-to-character space width is set to 00.  
Rotational angle of bar code  
0: 0°  
1: 90°  
2: 180°  
3: 270°  
llll:  
Height of the bar code  
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)  
mnnnnnnnnnn:  
Increment/decrement  
(Omissible. If omitted, incrementing/decrementing is not  
performed.)  
m:  
Indicates whether to increment or decrement  
+: Increment  
-:  
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value  
0000000000 to 9999999999  
Decrement  
p:  
Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars  
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)  
0: Non-print  
1: Print  
qq:  
r:  
No. of zeros to be suppressed  
(Omissible. If omitted, the zero suppression process is not performed.)  
00 to 20  
Designates the attachment of start/stop code  
(Omissible. If omitted, the start/stop code is automatically attached.)  
T: Attachment of start code only  
P: Attachment of stop code only  
N: Start/stop code unattached  
sss------sss:  
Data string to be printed (Omissible)  
Max. 126 digits. However, the number of digits varies depending on  
the type of bar code.  
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20:  
Link field No. (Omissible)  
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)  
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.  
- 67 -  
In the case of Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)  
Format  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn) (= ooo ------ooo)  
[LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn)  
(= pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20) [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa:  
Bar code number  
00 to 31  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
d:  
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of bar code  
Q: Data Matrix (Two-dimensional code)  
ee:  
ECC type  
00 to 14: If value “00” to “14” is designated, barcode command is ignored.  
20: ECC200  
ff:  
1-cell width  
00 to 99 (in dots)  
gg:  
h:  
Format ID  
No function (ignore)  
Rotational angle of bar code  
0: 0°  
1: 90°  
2: 180°  
3: 270°  
Ciiijjj:  
No. of cells  
(Omissible. If omitted, it is automatically set.)  
iii: No. of cells in X direction  
jjj: No. of cells in Y direction  
000 to 144  
000 to 144  
* Cell setting varies according to the ECC type.  
ECC200  
No. of cells to be  
designated  
Even numbers only  
Min./Max. No. of cells 10 × 10 to 144 × 144  
Rectangular code  
18 × 8  
32 × 8  
26 × 12  
36 × 12  
36 × 16  
48 × 16  
• When this parameter is omitted, the number of cells is automatically  
set. Also, when any data other than the above values is designated  
for the number of cells in X and Y directions, the number of cells is  
automatically set.  
- 68 -  
Jkkllmmmnnn: Connection setting  
(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)  
kk:  
ll:  
Code number  
01 to 16  
No. of divided codes  
02 to 16  
mmm: ID number 1  
nnn: ID number 2  
001 to 254  
001 to 254  
ooo ------ ooo:  
Data string to be printed (Omissible)  
Max. 2048 digits.  
pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20: Link field No. (Omissible)  
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)  
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.  
- 69 -  
In the case of PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)  
Format  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa:  
Bar code number  
00 to 31  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
d:  
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of bar code  
P: PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)  
ee:  
Security level  
00: Level 0  
01: Level 1  
02: Level 2  
03: Level 3  
04: Level 4  
05: Level 5  
06: Level 6  
07: Level 7  
08: Level 8  
ff:  
1-module width  
01 to 10 (in dots)  
gg:  
h:  
No. of columns (strings)  
01 to 30  
Rotational angle of bar code  
0: 0°  
1: 90°  
2: 180°  
3: 270°  
iiii:  
Bar height  
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)  
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)  
Max. 2,048 digits  
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)  
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can be also used.)  
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.  
- 70 -  
In the case of MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)  
Format  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (=jjj------jjj) [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20) [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa:  
Bar code number  
00 to 31  
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
d:  
Type of bar code  
X: MicroPDF417 (Two-dimensional code)  
ee:  
Security level  
00: Fixed  
ff:  
1-module width  
01 to 10 (in dots)  
gg:  
No. of columns/rows  
00 to 38  
h:  
Rotational angle of bar code  
0: 0°  
1: 90°  
2: 180°  
3: 270°  
iiii:  
Bar height  
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)  
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)  
Max. 366 digits  
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)  
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)  
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.  
- 71 -  
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417  
Parameter  
(gg)  
Max. number of digits  
for binary mode  
Max. number of digits for  
upper case letter/space mode  
Max. number of digits  
for numeric mode  
No. of columns No. of rows  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
1
2
3
4
150  
22  
250  
38  
366  
55  
43  
72  
105  
237  
366  
97  
162  
250  
150  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
14  
17  
20  
24  
28  
3
6
8
7
12  
18  
22  
30  
38  
17  
26  
32  
44  
55  
1
10  
13  
18  
22  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
8
8
14  
24  
36  
46  
56  
64  
72  
20  
35  
11  
14  
17  
20  
23  
26  
14  
21  
27  
33  
38  
43  
52  
2
67  
82  
93  
105  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
6
6
10  
18  
14  
26  
8
10  
15  
20  
27  
39  
54  
68  
82  
97  
10  
12  
15  
20  
26  
32  
38  
44  
26  
38  
34  
49  
3
46  
67  
66  
96  
90  
132  
167  
202  
237  
114  
138  
162  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
4
8
14  
22  
20  
32  
6
13  
8
20  
34  
49  
10  
12  
15  
20  
26  
32  
38  
44  
27  
46  
67  
34  
58  
85  
4
45  
76  
111  
155  
208  
261  
313  
366  
63  
106  
142  
178  
214  
250  
85  
106  
128  
150  
“–” for parameter 00 to 04 indicates that the numbers of columns/rows are automatically set by the printer.  
In this case, the pattern which has a smaller number of code words is automatically selected. When the  
numbers of code words is equal, the smaller number of columns is selected.  
- 72 -  
In the case of QR code (Two-dimensional code)  
Format  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= nnn --- nnn) [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= oo1, oo2, oo3 ------ oo20)  
[LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa:  
Bar code number  
00 to 31  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
d:  
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of bar code  
T: QR code (Two-dimensional code)  
e:  
Designation of error correction level  
L: High density level  
M: Standard level  
Q: Reliability level  
H: High reliability level  
ff:  
g:  
1-cell width  
00 to 52 (in dots)  
Selection of mode  
M: Manual mode  
A: Automatic mode  
h:  
Rotational angle of the bar code  
0: 0°  
1: 90°  
2: 180°  
3: 270°  
Mi:  
Kj:  
Selection of model  
(Omissible. If omitted, Model 1 is automatically selected.)  
i = 1: Model 1  
2: Model 2  
Mask number  
(Omissible. If omitted, the number is automatically set.)  
j = 0 to 7: Mask number 0 to 7  
8:  
Jkkllmm: Connection setting  
(Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)  
kk = 01 to 16: Value indicating which divided code is connected.  
ll = 01 to 16: Number of divided codes  
No mask  
mm = 00 to FF: A value for all data to be printed, to which XOR is applied  
in units of bytes (Not divided)  
nnn --- nnn: Data string to be printed (Omissible)  
Max. 2000 digits  
oo1 --- oo20: Link field No. (Omissible)  
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)  
Up to 20 digits can be designated using commas.  
- 73 -  
In the case of MaxiCode (Two-dimensional code)  
Format  
Term  
[ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (, e) (, Jffgg) (, Zh) [LF] [NUL]  
aa:  
Bar code number  
00 to 31  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
d:  
Print origin of X-coordinate of the bar code  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Print origin of Y-coordinate of the bar code  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Type of bar code  
Z: MaxiCode (Two-dimensional code)  
e:  
Mode selection (Omissible)  
Omitted: Mode 2  
0:  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
7:  
8:  
9:  
Mode 0 (Old specification)  
Mode 1 (Old specification)  
Mode 2 (New specification)  
Mode 3 (New specification)  
Mode 4 (New specification)  
Mode 2 (New specification)  
Mode 6 (New specification)  
Mode 2 (New specification)  
Mode 2 (New specification)  
Mode 2 (New specification)  
Jffgg:  
Zh:  
Connection setting (Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)  
(If mode 0 or mode 1 is designated, it is ignored.)  
ff: Code number  
01 to 08  
01 to 08  
gg: No. of divided codes  
Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block (If mode 0 or mode 1 is  
designated, it is ignored.)  
(Omissible. If omitted, they are not attached.)  
h= 0: No attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block  
1: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block  
2: Attachment of Zipper block  
3: Attachment of Contrast block  
- 74 -  
Explanation  
(1) Bar code number  
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the  
bar code is selected.  
(2) Print origin of coordinates  
Backing paper  
Backing paper  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Label  
Label  
Print origin of  
coordinates  
Effective  
print  
length  
Effective  
print  
length  
Print origin of  
coordinates  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
X
Effective  
print width  
Effective  
print width  
0
Y
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
Y
0
X
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]  
[Print direction: Printing top first]  
The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of bar code drawing will be  
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).  
[Effective print area]  
[mm]  
Model  
B-SV4D  
Item  
Method  
Batch  
8.0  
Strip  
Cutter  
13.0  
Effective print width  
Min.  
13.0  
Max.  
108 ± 0.2  
Effective  
print length  
Min.  
23.4  
Label  
Max.  
Min.  
607.6  
8.0  
Tag  
13.0  
Max.  
607.6  
607.6  
- 75 -  
(3) Type of bar code  
0: JAN8, EAN8  
1: MSI  
2: Interleaved 2 of 5  
3: CODE39 (standard)  
5: JAN13, EAN13  
7: EAN13 + 2 digits  
9: A: CODE128  
C: CODE93  
4: NW7  
6: UPC-E  
8: EAN13 +5 digits  
B: CODE39 (Full ASCII)  
G: UPC-E + 2 digits  
I: EAN8 + 2 digits  
K: UPC-A  
H: UPC-E + 5 digits  
J: EAN8 + 5 digits  
L: UPC-A + 2 digits  
- 76 -  
M: UPC-A + 5 digits  
O: Industrial 2 of 5  
Q: Data Matrix  
N: UCC/EAN128  
P: PDF417  
R: Customer bar code  
S: Highest priority customer bar code  
T: QR code  
V: RM4SCC  
U: POSTNET  
W: KIX code  
X: MicroPDF417  
Z: MaxiCode  
- 77 -  
(4) Type of check digit  
Where no check digit is attached, the bar code of the data row will be drawn.  
In the case of the check digit check, if each check digit checked according to  
the type of bar code is normal, the bar code will be drawn. If the check digit not  
meeting the requirement is designated, the bar code will not be drawn.  
In the case of the check digit auto attachment, each check digit is attached  
according to the type of bar code and the bar code is drawn.  
If the type of bar code is CODE93, CODE128 (with auto code selection), or  
UCC/EAN128, the check digit will always be attached regardless of the  
designation of the type of check digit.  
If the type of bar code is JAN, EAN, or UPC, the designation of no check digit  
attachment automatically assume the check digit check.  
DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.  
(5) Bar width, space width, and character-to-character space  
Designate the bar, space, and character-to-character space widths according to  
the type of bar code. Note that the designated proper value differs according to  
the rotational angle of bar code, type, number of digits, print speed, paper used,  
etc. Examples of such designations are listed below. (1 dot = 1/12 mm)  
In the case of JAN, EAN, UPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, PDF417, or  
MicroPDF417, a 2 to 6-module width is calculated automatically when a 1-module  
width is designated.  
Type of bar code 1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules  
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space  
JAN, EAN, UPC  
CODE93  
4
3
3
3
2
8
6
6
6
4
12  
9
16  
12  
12  
12  
8
-
-
-
-
9
-
-
CODE128, EAN128  
PDF417  
9
15  
10  
18  
12  
MicroPDF417  
6
Type of bar code  
Narrow  
Wide  
Character-to-character  
Bar Space Bar Space  
space  
MSI  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0
0
0
3
3
3
ITF  
CODE39  
NW7  
Industrial 2 of 5  
When NW7 is used, transmission of the space character assumes the space of (narrow  
space ×12) dots. In this case, the space is max. 255 dots.  
In the case of Data Matrix  
1-cell width  
When 1-cell width is 00 for the Data Matrix,  
a
two-dimensional code is not drawn.  
1-cell width = 3  
However, the two-dimensional code printed  
on the previous label is cleared.  
- 78 -  
In the case of QR code  
1-cell width  
1-cell width  
When the 1-cell width is 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the bar  
code printed on the previous label is cleared.  
In the case of a postal code  
1-module width  
(6) Rotational angle of bar code  
Point of origin  
0°  
90°  
180°  
270°  
Point of origin  
0°  
90°  
180°  
270°  
- 79 -  
(7) Bar code height  
Height  
Height  
[PDF417, MicroPDF417]  
Height  
Height  
[Postal code]  
Height  
When the bar code height is 0000, bar code (including guard bars) and numerals  
under bars are not drawn. However, the bar code printed on the previous label is  
cleared.  
(8) Length of guard bar  
The length of guard bar is valid only when the type of bar code is WPC.  
It is ignored in any other cases.  
Height of bar code  
Length of guard bar  
- 80 -  
(9) Numerals under bars  
Numerals are not or provided under bars according the parameter for the  
presence or absence of numerals under bars. The contents of numerals under  
bars to be printed vary according to the type of bar code. The character set of  
numerals under bars is OCR-B. Such numerals are enlarged or reduced only  
horizontally according to the width of the bar code. They are drawn vertically in the  
fixed one magnification.  
[Drawing positions of numerals under bars]  
In the case of JAN and EAN  
(Example) EAN13 + 2 digits  
(Example) EAN8  
In the case of UPC  
(Example) UPC-A + 2 digits  
(Example) UPC-E  
- 81 -  
In the case of bar codes other than JAN, EAN, and UPC  
(Example) CODE39  
(Example) UCC/EAN128  
(10) Start/Stop Code  
This parameter is valid only when the type of bar code is CODE39 and NW7.  
Where the parameter is designated, the program will not check if the transmit print data  
is with a start code and stop code.  
When the parameter is omitted in the case of CODE39 and NW7, a start/stop code will  
be attached. The code to be added is “*” in the case of CODE39, and “a” in the case of  
NW7.  
For details, refer to “Auto Attachment of Start/Stop Code” to be discussed later in this  
specification.  
(11) Increment/decrement  
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is  
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row  
will not be drawn.  
When CODE128 (without auto code selection) is used, the number of the start code (code  
A, code B, and code C) digits is regarded as 2.  
Initial value  
INC/DEC  
0000  
0000  
+10  
0000  
+10  
0000  
+10  
999999  
+1  
+10  
Not  
designated  
Zero suppression  
5
3
0
3
1st label  
2nd label  
3rd label  
4th label  
5th label  
0000  
0010  
0020  
0030  
0040  
0000  
0010  
0020  
0030  
0040  
000  
010  
020  
030  
040  
0000  
0010  
0020  
0030  
0040  
999999  
000  
001  
002  
003  
- 82 -  
Letters and numerals for increment/decrement  
For CODE39 (standard), CODE39 (full ASCII), NW-7, CODE93, CODE128, if a data  
string other than numerals is included in the data, increment/decrement designation is  
performed. If any code which does not exist in each bar code table is contained in the  
data, increment/decrement designation is not performed.  
Up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals and symbols) are possible. Only the  
numerals are picked up and calculated for incrementing/decrementing, and then are  
returned to the previous position to draw the data.  
Example of increment/decrement calculation  
Initial value  
INC/DEC  
00000  
+1  
A0A0A  
+1  
7A8/9  
+3  
A2A0A  
-3  
1st label  
2nd label  
3rd label  
4th label  
5th label  
00000  
00001  
00002  
00003  
00004  
A0A0A  
A0A1A  
A0A2A  
A0A3A  
A0A4A  
7A8/9  
7A9/2  
7A9/5  
7A9/8  
8A0/1  
A2A0A  
A1A7A  
A1A4A  
A1A1A  
A0A8A  
Example of increment/decrement of data including the special codes of CODE128  
Increment/decrement calculation starts from the last digit in the data strings. When  
the data string to be calculated is numeric, and the next (upper) digit is “>”, that is a  
special code (shown with underline below). The next digit is calculated without  
incrementing/decrementing these two digits.  
Example of increment/decrement calculation of CODE128  
Initial value  
INC/DEC  
00000  
+1  
00>08  
+1  
0A>08  
+1  
0A9>08  
+1  
1st label  
2nd label  
3rd label  
4th label  
5th label  
00000  
00001  
00002  
00003  
00004  
00>08  
00>09  
01>00  
01>01  
01>02  
0A>08  
0A>09  
1A>00  
1A>01  
1A>02  
0A9>08  
0A9>09  
1A0>00  
1A0>01  
1A0>02  
(12) Zero suppression  
0
1
2
2
3
4
5
No. of zeros to be suppressed  
Data  
Print  
0000  
0000  
0000  
0
0000  
00  
0A12  
A12  
0123  
123  
0123  
0123  
0123  
0123  
The leading zero(s) in a data row is replaced by a space(s) according to the designated  
number of digits. However, if the number of digits to be suppressed is greater than the  
data row, the data row will be drawn without zero suppression. Where the data row  
exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be drawn.  
When the print data including start/stop code is sent to sending print data, the start/stop  
code is also counted as a digit. When the bar code type is JAN, EAN, UPC, or UCC/EAN  
128, the data will be drawn without zero suppression.  
- 83 -  
(13) Data string to be printed  
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol  
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed varies according to the types of bar  
codes. For codes, refer to the bar code table mentioned later.  
(14) Link field No.  
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.” After the link  
field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data string are linked by the Link  
Field Data Command to draw an image.  
Up to 20 fields can be linked.  
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.  
[Format Command]  
[ESC] PC01;................... ; 01 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC02;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC03;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]  
: Link field No. 1 is designated.  
: Link field No. 3 is designated.  
: Link field No. 4 is designated.  
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are  
designated.  
[ESC] PC04;................... ; 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC05;................... ; 03 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC06;................... ; 04 [LF] [NUL]  
: Link field No. 2 is designated.  
: Link field No. 3 is designated.  
: Link field No. 4 is designated.  
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are  
designated.  
Designating link field No.  
[Data Command]  
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]  
Link field No. 4  
Link field No. 3  
Link field No. 2  
Link field No. 1  
A
B
ABCD  
001  
ABCD  
001  
*ABCD001*  
*ABCD001*  
- 84 -  
(15) Explanation for Data Matrix  
ECC type  
Data Matrix contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error  
correction code (ECC) and restore normal data. Since there are several ECCs. ECC  
should be designated according to usage. The general correction ability is as follows.  
However, it may vary according to the error conditions.  
ECC type  
ECC200  
Overhead by ECC  
Approx. 30%  
Format ID No function (Ignore)  
Maximum number of digits  
The maximum number of digits varies according to the ECC type. Since each Kanji  
character uses 2 bytes, the maximum number of digits for it becomes half of the  
following values.  
Numeric  
2000  
Alphanumeric  
2000  
8 bit  
ECC200  
1556  
For the maximum number of digits in cell units, see the next page.  
Connection setting  
The connection setting is used to comprise data with a set of two-dimensional codes  
when the data cannot be expressed with a two-dimensional code. When three two-  
dimensional codes are used to comprise data, identification information of 1/3, 2/3,  
and 3/3 is inserted into each two-dimensional code. The ID number is programmed to  
include a proper combination of two-dimensional codes when one label contains plural  
connecting symbols. For example, when there are two kinds of data containing  
identification information for 1/2 and 2/2 in the same label, combination of two-  
dimensional codes is unclear. By adding the ID number, the combination is made  
clear.  
- 85 -  
Cell size and the effective data capacity  
ECC200  
Numeric Alphanum  
capacity  
8-bit  
byte  
Symbol size  
Row Col  
capacity  
Capacit  
y
10 10  
6
3
1
12 12 10  
14 14 16  
16 16 24  
18 18 36  
20 20 44  
22 22 60  
24 24 72  
26 26 88  
32 32 124  
6
3
10  
16  
25  
31  
43  
52  
64  
91  
6
10  
16  
20  
28  
34  
42  
60  
84  
36 36 172 127  
40 40 228 169 112  
44 44 288 214 142  
48 48 348 259 172  
52 52 408 304 202  
64 64 560 418 278  
72 72 736 550 366  
80 80 912 682 454  
88 88 1152 862 574  
96 96 1392 1042 694  
104 104 1632 1222 814  
120 120 2000 1573 1048  
132 132 2000 1954 1302  
144 144 2000 2000 1556  
Rectangular code  
ECC200  
Numeric Alphanum  
8-bit  
byte  
Symbol size  
capacity  
capacity  
capacity  
Row  
8
Col  
18 10  
32 20  
6
3
8
13  
22  
31  
46  
72  
8
12 26 32  
12 36 44  
16 36 64  
16 48 98  
14  
20  
30  
47  
- 86 -  
(16) Explanation for the PDF417 and MicroPDF417  
Security level  
The PDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error  
correcting code word and restore normal data. The security level should be  
designated according to usage to perform the error correction function.  
For the MicroPDF417, the printer sets the security level automatically.  
No. of error correction  
Security level  
Error Correction Ability  
code words  
Level 0  
Level 1  
Level 2  
Level 3  
Level 4  
Level 5  
Level 6  
Level 7  
Level 8  
0
2
6
14  
30  
62  
126  
254  
510  
Low  
High  
No. of columns (strings)  
The number of rows is variable in the PDF417. The row length (No. of data strings) is  
also variable. Therefore, a symbol can be created in a form that can be easily printed,  
by changing the proportion of the height and width.  
The number of columns (data strings) is variable between 1 and 30.  
If the number of columns is small when data amount is large and security level is high,  
drawing may not be performed. This is because the number of rows exceeds 90 when  
the number of columns becomes small. (When the PDF417 is used, the number of  
rows of symbols is limited from 3 to 90.)  
For the MicroPDF417, not only the number of columns (data strings) but also the  
number of rows (data lines) can be designated. When these are to be designated, see  
the table on page 72. Note that the max. number of digits for the set parameter (gg)  
varies according to the character type. If data over the max. number of digits for the  
set parameter (gg) is set, the bar code is not printed. The number of columns (data  
strings) is variable from 1 to 4.  
However, the max. number of lines, which is 44, depends on the number of columns.  
(17) Explanation for QR code  
Error correction level  
The QR code contains functions to detect and correct an error. If one of the data  
characters is damaged, the information can be restored when this code is read.  
There are 4 levels that can be designated. The level should be specified according to  
usage. The general correction ability is as follows.  
Overhead by correcting  
Level  
Error correction ability  
Low  
an error  
High density level  
Standard level  
7%  
15%  
25%  
30%  
Reliability level  
High reliability level  
High  
- 87 -  
1-cell width  
1-cell width  
1-cell width  
When the 1-cell width is 0, a two-dimensional code is not drawn. However, the two-  
dimensional code printed on the previous label is cleared.  
Selection of mode  
All codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji can be used in one QR code.  
Manual mode or automatic mode can be selected to perform the operation.  
Selection of model  
Model 1: Original specification  
Model 2: Extended specification which enhances the function of position correction  
and can contain a large amount of data.  
Mask number  
To be sure to read the QR code, it is preferable that white and black modules are  
arranged in this symbol in a balanced manner. This prevents the bit pattern  
“1011101”, which is characteristically seen in the position detecting pattern, from  
appearing in the symbol as much as possible.  
The mask number is 0 to 7. The pattern is determined by placing each masking  
pattern for the mask number upon the module pattern. When the mask number is set  
to 8, masking is not performed. When the parameter is omitted, the most appropriate  
mask number is automatically selected to perform masking.  
Connection setting  
For QR code, data can be divided into several codes. Even though there is only a  
narrow print space, the code can be entered in the space by dividing the code. The  
data can be divided into a max. of 16 codes. Parity data is obtained by XORing all  
input data in units of bytes before dividing. The input data is calculated based on shift  
JIS for Kanji, or on JIS 8 for others. Examples are shown below:  
“0123456789  
” is divided into “0123”, “4567”, and “89  
”.  
Code No. 1  
Code No. 2  
Code No. 3  
No. of divided codes: 3  
No. of divided codes: 3  
No. of divided codes: 3  
Parity data: 84  
Parity data: 84  
Parity data: 84  
Data “0123”  
Data “4567”  
Data “89  
* The parity data is the XORed value for “0123456789  
”.  
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 93 FA 96 7B = 84  
(18) Explanation for MaxiCode  
Connection setting  
For MaxiCode, data can be divided into a max. of 8 codes.  
- 88 -  
Notes  
(1) The check digit attach and increment/decrement, and zero suppress processes are  
performed according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no drawing  
will take place.  
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero suppression but  
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.  
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit  
(2) Up to 32 fields for which incrementing/decrementing has been designated can be drawn. If  
the total of bit map font, outline font or bar code increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,  
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field to  
be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer Clear  
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.  
[Example]  
Format Command (Increment bar code No. 01 (+1))  
Format Command (Increment bar code No. 02 (+2))  
Image Buffer Clear Command  
Data Command (Bar code No. 01 “0001”)  
Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “0100”)  
Issue Command (2 labels)  
(0001)  
(0100)  
(0002)  
(0102)  
Issue Command (1 label)  
(0003)  
(0104)  
Image Buffer Clear Command  
Data Command (Bar code No. 02 “3000”)  
Issue Command (1 label)  
(3000)  
- 89 -  
(3) More than one Bar Code Format Command can be connected when transmitted.  
[ESC]  
XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]  
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]  
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing  
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the bar code number, then the next  
drawing data is printed. Therefore, the bar code number which differs according to the  
drawing fields should be designated. Since the automatic field clear is not performed  
between the Clear Command ([ESC] C) and issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may  
be drawn using the same bar code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data  
Command should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the  
same bar code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)  
(5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same bar  
code No. and reformatting data.  
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.  
(6) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.  
(7) The same barcode number cannot be programmed more than once in one format (one  
page).  
Refer to  
Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)  
Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)  
Bar Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)  
- 90 -  
Examples  
(1)  
Origin (0, 0)  
12.5  
mm  
Effective print area  
15.0  
mm  
55.0  
mm  
20.0 mm  
83.0 mm  
15.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150=12345 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 91 -  
(2)  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
30.0  
mm  
55.0  
mm  
S 0 0 1  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 92 -  
(3)  
Origin (0, 0)  
12.5  
mm  
Effective print area  
55.5  
mm  
20.0 mm  
83.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 93 -  
6.3.10 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND  
[ESC] RC  
Function  
Format  
Provides data for the bit map font row.  
[ESC] RCaaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]  
Link Field Data Command  
[ESC] RC; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aaa:  
Character string number  
000 to 199 (Two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable.)  
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed  
Max. 255 digits  
(Max. 127 digits when the font type is 51, 52, 53, 54, or 55.)  
Any excess data will be discarded.  
For the character codes, refer to the character code table to be given  
later in this specification.  
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1  
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2  
to  
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99  
Explanation  
(1) Link field data string  
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are  
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.  
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. However, when the font type is  
51, 52, 53, 54, or 55, only up to 127 digits can be linked.  
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be  
discarded.  
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.  
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the  
Link Field Data Command.  
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following  
process is performed:  
No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due  
to the omission.  
When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only  
remaining data will be processed as print data.  
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline  
font fields, and bar code fields.  
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command  
code is designated.)  
Refer to  
Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)  
- 94 -  
Examples  
(1)  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
12.5 mm  
Sam ple  
55.0 mm  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 95 -  
(2)  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
30.0  
mm  
55.0  
mm  
S 0 0 1  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 96 -  
6.3.11 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND  
[ESC] RV  
Function  
Format  
Provides data for the outline font row.  
[ESC] RVaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]  
Link Field Data Command  
[ESC] RV; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa:  
Character string number  
00 to 99  
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed  
Max. 255 digits  
Any excess data will be discarded.  
For the character codes, refer to the character code table to be given  
later in this specification.  
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1  
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2  
to  
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99  
Explanation  
(1) Link field data string  
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are  
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.  
• Up to 255 digits of data strings can be linked. Data exceeding the max. number  
of digits will be discarded.  
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.  
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the  
Link Field Data Command.  
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following  
process is performed:  
No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to  
the omission.  
When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only  
remaining data will be processed as print data.  
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline  
font fields, and bar code fields.  
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command  
code is designated.)  
Refer to  
Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)  
- 97 -  
Examples  
(1)  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
12.5 mm  
Sam ple  
55.0 mm  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 98 -  
(2)  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
30.0  
mm  
55.0  
mm  
S 0 0 1  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 99 -  
6.3.12 BAR CODE DATA COMMAND  
[ESC] RB  
Function  
Format  
Provides data for the bar code.  
[ESC] RBaa; bbb ------ bbb [LF] [NUL]  
Link Field Data Command  
[ESC] RB; ccc ------ ccc [LF] ddd ------ ddd [LF] ------ [LF] xxx ------ xxx [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa:  
Bar code number  
00 to 31  
bbb ------ bbb: Data string to be printed  
The maximum number of digits varies according to the type of bar code.  
ccc ------ ccc: Data string of link field No. 1  
ddd ------ ddd: Data string of link field No. 2  
to  
xxx ------ xxx: Data string of link field No. 99  
The Data Command for the MaxiCode is described later.  
(1) Data check  
Explanation  
If there is data in the data row, which does not meet the type of bar code, the bar  
code will not be drawn. If wrong code selection takes place in the data row of  
CODE128 (without auto code selection), the bar code will not be drawn.  
If there is data different from the one designated using the format ID when Data  
Matrix is used, the symbol is not drawn.  
(2) No. of digits of data  
When data exceeding the maximum number of digits is sent, the excess data will  
be discarded. For the maximum number of digits for each bar code, see below.  
Data Matrix, PDF417, QR code:  
MicroPDF417:  
2000 digits  
366 digits  
93 digits  
MaxiCode:  
Customer bar code:  
Highest priority customer bar code:  
POSTNET:  
20 digits  
19 digits  
5, 9, 11 digits  
ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE: 12 digits  
KIX CODE:  
18 digits  
Bar codes other than the above  
126 digits  
When the number of digits does not correspond to the bar code type, the bar code  
is not drawn.  
For the MaxiCode, the maximum number of digits varies according to the mode. In  
mode 2 or 3 and mode 4 or 6, the maximum number of digits is 84 and 93,  
respectively.  
- 100 -  
The maximum number of digits for Data Matrix varies according to the settings for  
ECC type, format ID, and the cell size. In the case of Kanji, the maximum number  
of digits is half those of the values described below since a Kanji character  
occupies 2 bytes.  
Max number of digits for Data Matrix  
Numeric  
2000  
Alphanumeric  
2000  
8 bit  
ECC200  
1556  
- 101 -  
Cell Size and Effective Data Capacity  
ECC200  
Numeric Alphanum  
capacity  
8-bit  
byte  
Symbol size  
Row Col  
capacity  
capacity  
10 10  
6
3
1
12 12 10  
14 14 16  
16 16 24  
18 18 36  
20 20 44  
22 22 60  
24 24 72  
26 26 88  
32 32 124  
6
3
10  
16  
25  
31  
43  
52  
64  
91  
6
10  
16  
20  
28  
34  
42  
60  
84  
36 36 172 127  
40 40 228 169 112  
44 44 288 214 142  
48 48 348 259 172  
52 52 408 304 202  
64 64 560 418 278  
72 72 736 550 366  
80 80 912 682 454  
88 88 1152 862 574  
96 96 1392 1042 694  
104 104 1632 1222 814  
120 120 2000 1573 1048  
132 132 2000 1954 1302  
144 144 2000 2000 1556  
Rectangular code  
ECC200  
Numeric Alphanum  
8-bit  
byte  
Symbol size  
capacity  
capacity  
capacity  
Row  
8
Col  
18 10  
32 20  
6
3
8
13  
22  
31  
46  
72  
8
12 26 32  
12 36 44  
16 36 64  
16 48 98  
14  
20  
30  
47  
- 102 -  
When PDF417 or MicroPDF417 is used, the number of symbol characters called  
code words is limited to 928 or less. Moreover, the data compression rate varies  
according to the contents of data. Therefore, the maximum number of digits  
according to modes is as follows.  
When letters and numerics are mixed in data in EXC mode, for example, the  
maximum values become smaller than the following values, since the internal  
mode switching code is used.  
To correct a reading error by designating the security level, the maximum value  
becomes smaller, since the error correction code words below are used.  
When the number of the code words exceeds 928, or when the number of lines  
exceeds 90, the symbols are not drawn.  
For the MicroPDF417, the numbers of rows and columns can be specified.  
The maximum number of digits varies according to the setting.  
In the case of PDF417  
• Extended Alphanumeric Compaction (EXC) mode: 1850 digits  
• Binary/ASCII Plus mode:  
1108 digits  
2000 digits  
• Numeric compaction mode:  
In the case of MicroPDF417  
• Binary mode:  
150 digits  
250 digits  
366 digits  
• Upper case letter/space mode:  
• Numeric compaction mode:  
For the MicroPDF417, the printer  
sets the security level automatically.  
No. of Error Correction Code Words of PDF417  
No. of error correction  
Security level Error Correction Ability  
Level 0  
code words  
0
2
6
14  
30  
62  
126  
254  
510  
Low  
Level 1  
Level 2  
Level 3  
Level 4  
Level 5  
Level 6  
Level 7  
Level 8  
High  
- 103 -  
The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417  
Parameter  
(gg)  
Max. number of digits  
for binary mode  
Max. number of digits for  
upper case letter/space mode  
Max. number of digits  
for numeric mode  
No. of columns No. of rows  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
1
2
3
4
150  
22  
250  
38  
366  
55  
43  
72  
105  
237  
366  
97  
162  
250  
150  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
14  
17  
20  
24  
28  
3
6
8
7
12  
18  
22  
30  
38  
17  
26  
32  
44  
55  
1
10  
13  
18  
22  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
8
8
14  
24  
36  
46  
56  
64  
72  
20  
35  
11  
14  
17  
20  
23  
26  
14  
21  
27  
33  
38  
43  
52  
2
67  
82  
93  
105  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
6
6
10  
18  
14  
26  
8
10  
15  
20  
27  
39  
54  
68  
82  
97  
10  
12  
15  
20  
26  
32  
38  
44  
26  
38  
34  
49  
3
46  
67  
66  
96  
90  
132  
167  
202  
237  
114  
138  
162  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
4
8
14  
22  
20  
32  
6
13  
8
20  
34  
49  
10  
12  
15  
20  
26  
32  
38  
44  
27  
46  
67  
34  
58  
85  
4
45  
76  
111  
155  
208  
261  
313  
366  
63  
106  
142  
178  
214  
250  
85  
106  
128  
150  
- 104 -  
(3) CODE128 code selection  
If the case of CODE128 (with auto code selection), code selection is performed in  
the following manner. (Conforming to USS-128 APPENDIX-G)  
Determining the start character  
(a) If the data begins with four or more consecutive numerals, the start code  
to be used is (CODE C).  
(b) In any case other than (a) in , if a control character appears before a  
small letter (see .) or four or more consecutive numerals, the start code  
is (CODE A).  
(c) In none of the above cases, the start code is (CODE B).  
If the data begins with an odd number of digits in (a),  
:
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the last numeric  
data. When (FNC1), if found in the number, breaks a pair of digits in the  
number, insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character before the numeric  
data preceding the (FNC1). Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should  
conform to (b) and (c) in  
.
If four or more digits of numeric data continue in (CODE A) or (CODE B).  
(a) When the numeric data is an even number of digits, insert the (CODE C)  
character just before the first numeric data.  
(b) When the numeric data is an odd number of digits, insert the (CODE C)  
character immediately after the first numeric data.  
If a control character appears in (CODE B):  
(a) In the subsequent data, when a small letter appears before the next  
control character or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)  
character before the first control character.  
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first control  
character.  
If a small letter appears in (CODE A):  
(a) In the subsequent data, when a control character appears before the next  
small letter or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT)  
character before the first small letter.  
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first small  
letter.  
If any data other than the numerals appears in (CODE C):  
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the data other  
than the numerals. Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should conform  
to (b) and (c) in  
.
- 105 -  
(4) CODE128 code selection check  
Check if selection of (CODE A), (CODE B), or (CODE C) of CODE128 has been  
set correctly. If an error is found, the bar code will not be drawn.  
[Conditions causing an error]  
No start code is designated.  
A small letter (including { , | , } , ~, _ ) is found in (CODE A).  
A control character is found in (CODE B).  
Any data other than the numerals, (FNC1), (CODE A), and (CODE B) is found  
in (CODE C).  
There are two or more consecutive (SHIFT) characters.  
The number in (CODE C) is an odd number of digits.  
(SHIFT) is followed by (CODE A), (CODE B) or (CODE C).  
(5) Kanji code selection  
• In the case of Data Matrix and PDF417, Kanji codes can be printed. Shift JIS,  
JIS hexadecimal, JIS 8 codes can be mixed.  
(6) Link field data string  
• After the link field No. is designated in the Format Command, data strings are  
linked using the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.  
• Up to 2000 digits of data strings of Data Matrix and PDF417 can be linked. For  
other bar codes, up to 126 digits can be linked. (The value varies according to  
the type of bar code.)  
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum value, excess data will be  
discarded.  
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.  
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the  
Link Field Data Command.  
• When the data string is omitted in the Link Field Data Command, the following  
process is performed:  
No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to  
the omission.  
When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only  
remaining data will be processed as print data.  
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline  
font fields, and bar code fields.  
(The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV”, or “RB” command  
code is designated.)  
- 106 -  
(7) When manual mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code  
Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode  
Mode selection  
Data to be printed  
Binary mode  
Mode selection  
No. of data strings  
(4 digits)  
Data to be printed  
“,” (comma)  
Mixed mode  
Data  
“,” (comma)  
Data  
Data  
The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji.  
Since data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used is  
designated when the mode is selected.  
Mode  
Code  
Details  
N
A
Numerals  
0 to 9  
Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space  
$ % * + - . / :  
B
K
Binary (8-bit)  
Kanji  
00H to FFH  
Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal  
If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.  
(8) When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code.  
Data to be printed  
(9) How to transmit the control code data  
NUL (00H)  
SOH (01H)  
STX (02H)  
=
=
=
> @ (3EH, 40H)  
> A (3EH, 41H)  
> B (3EH, 42H)  
GS (1DH)  
RS (1EH)  
US (1FH)  
=
=
=
> ] (3EH, 5DH)  
> ^ (3EH, 5EH)  
> _ (3EH, 5FH)  
* How to transmit the special codes  
> (3EH) > 0 (3EH, 30H)  
=
- 107 -  
(10) Transfer code for QR code  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
SOH DC1  
STX DC2  
ETX DC3  
EOT DC4  
ENQ NAK  
ACK SYN  
BEL ETB  
BS CAN  
HT EM  
!
q
r
#
$
%
&
s
t
u
v
G
H
I
g
h
i
w
(
x
)
y
LF SUB  
VT ESC  
*
J
j
z
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
{
FF  
FS  
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
CR GS  
SO RS  
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
^
~
SI  
US  
/
_
DEL  
* The shaded parts are Japanese.  
They are omitted here.  
(11) Examples of data designation  
Alphanumeric mode: ABC123  
A A B C 1 2 3  
Data to be printed  
Designation of mode  
Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H  
B 0 0 0 6 > A > C > E  
Data to be printed  
No. of data strings  
Designation of mode  
Mixed mode  
Numeric mode  
Kanji mode  
:
:
:
123456  
Kanji data  
Binary mode  
a
i
u
e
o
Alphanumeric mode : ABC  
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a  
i
u
e
o
, A A B C  
Data to be  
printed  
Data to be  
printed  
No. of  
data strings  
Data to be printed  
Data to be  
printed  
Designation of mode  
Automatic mode  
When the data above ( ) is designated in automatic mode:  
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a A B C  
Data to be printed  
i
u
e
o
- 108 -  
(12) MaxiCode data  
For mode 0 or 1:  
[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL]  
For mode 2 or 3:  
[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL]  
For mode 4 or 6:  
[ESC] RBaa; fffffffffggggg --- ggggg [LF] [NUL]  
bbbbbbbbb:  
• Mode 0 or 2:  
b1b2b3b4b5:  
b6b7b8b9:  
Postal code  
Fixed as 9 digits  
Zip code  
Fixed as 5 digits (Numerics)  
Zip code extension Fixed as 4 digits (Numerics)  
• Mode 1 or 3:  
b1b2b3b4b5b6: Zip code  
Fixed as 6 digits (Character “A” of  
code set)  
b7b8b9:  
ccc:  
ddd:  
Vacant  
Class of service  
Country code  
Fixed as 3 digits (20H)  
Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)  
Fixed as 3 digits (Numerics)  
84 digits  
eee --- eee: Message data strings  
fffffffff:  
Primary message data strings  
9 digits  
ggg --- ggg: Secondary message data strings  
84 digits  
NOTES: 1. When anything other than numerics is included in the data string of zip  
code (mode 2), zip code extension, class of service or country code, a  
MaxiCode is not drawn.  
2. If the message data is less than 84 digits when mode 2 or 3 is selected,  
the printer adds a CR (000000) at the end of the data, and the remaining  
digits will be padded with FSs (011100). When message data exceeding  
84 digits is received, the excess data will be discarded before drawing a  
MaxiCode.  
3. If the message data is less than 93 digits (9 digits + 84 digits) when mode  
4 or 6 is selected, the printer adds a CR (000000) at the end of the data,  
and the remaining digits will be padded with FSs (011100). When  
message data exceeding 93 digits is received, the excess data will be  
discarded before drawing a MaxiCode.  
4. Mode 6 should not be used for usual operation since it is used for  
scanner programming.  
- 109 -  
Examples  
(1)  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
12.5 mm  
15.0 mm  
55.0 mm  
20.0 mm  
63.0 mm  
15.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RB01; 12345 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RB02; ABC [LF] [NUL]  
*
*
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 110 -  
(2)  
Origin (0, 0)  
Effective print area  
30.0  
mm  
55.0  
mm  
S 0 0 1  
20.0 mm  
65.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RB; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 111 -  
(3)  
Origin (0, 0)  
12.5  
mm  
Effective print area  
55.5  
mm  
20.0 mm  
83.0 mm  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 04, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 112 -  
6.3.13 ISSUE COMMAND  
[ESC] XS  
Issues labels according to the print conditions programmed.  
[ESC] XS; I, aaaa, bbbcdefgh [LF] [NUL]  
Function  
Format  
Term  
aaaa:  
bbb:  
Number of labels to be issued  
0001 to 9999  
Cut interval. Designates the number of pieces to be printed before the backing  
paper is cut.  
000 to 100 (no cut when 000)  
c:  
Type of sensor  
0: No sensor  
1: Reflective sensor  
2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)  
3: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)  
4: Reflective sensor  
d:  
e:  
Issue mode  
C: Batch mode  
D: Strip mode (with back feed, the strip sensor is valid.)  
E: Strip mode (with back feed, the strip sensor is ignored,  
the applicator supports this mode.)  
Issue speed  
1: 2 inches/sec  
2: 2 inches/sec  
3: 3 inches/sec  
4: 4 inches/sec  
5: 5 inches/sec  
6: 5 inches/sec  
7: 5 inches/sec  
8: 5 inches/sec  
9: 5 inches/sec  
A: 5 inches/sec  
f:  
With/without ribbon  
Ignore  
g:  
Designates tag rotation.  
0: Printing bottom first  
1: Printing top first  
2: Mirror printing bottom first  
3: Mirror printing top first  
h:  
Type of status response  
0: No status response  
1: Status response  
- 113 -  
Explanation  
(1) Number of labels to be issued  
If increment/decrement is not specified, the designated number of pieces with  
the same drawing data will be issued.  
If increment /decrement is specified, the designated number of pieces will be  
issued while incrementing/decrementing the piece of the designated drawing  
area.  
* The increment/decrement designation is valid until the Image Buffer Clear  
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.  
(2) Cut interval  
The cut interval is valid only when the cutter has been installed and the issue mode  
is “C”. If an error occurs during an issue after the cut interval is designated, and  
then printing is restarted, the printer ejects the printed paper then resumes printing  
on the paper where the error occurred.  
If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 3 seconds after cut-issuing  
the last label, when the cut interval is valid and “with automatic forward feed  
standby” set in the system mode, the printer automatically performs a 10-mm  
forward feed.  
When the Issue Command is received during the automatic forward feed standby,  
an issue is started after a reverse feed to the original position.  
If any command is sent and processed after the Issue Command is sent, the  
automatic forward feed is not performed. Therefore, a command should not be  
sent after the Issue Command is sent. If the power should not be turned off then  
on, or the printer should not be placed in a pause/reset state before the automatic  
forward feed, since the automatic forward feed is not performed when the paper is  
fed by turning the power off then on, or by pressing the [FEED] key of the printer in  
the pause/reset state.  
If the paper is fed by pressing the [FEED] key of the printer during the forward feed  
standby, the printer feeds one label, cuts, performs the automatic forward feed  
then stops.  
(3) Type of sensor  
No sensor: Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the  
Label Size Set Command.  
Reflective sensor:  
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size  
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag  
paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper position is  
finely adjusted for every piece.  
Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels):  
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size  
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the  
transmissive sensor and the paper position is finely adjusted for every piece.  
- 114 -  
(4) Issue mode  
[C: Batch mode (cut interval 0)]  
Head position  
(1) Idling  
(during automatic forward feed standby)  
(2) Prints 1st label (A)  
A
(3) Prints 2nd label (B)  
(4) Prints 3rd label (C)  
A
B
B
C
A
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]  
“Without automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode  
Cut position  
Head position  
(1) Idling  
(2) End of printing 1st label (A)  
(3) Feeds to the cut position  
A
A
(4) The 1st label (A) reaches the cut position  
and is cut.  
A
(5) Feeds back to the head position and start to  
print the 2nd label (B) .  
B
B
(6) End of printing 2nd label (B)  
(7) Feeds to the cut position  
B
(8) The 2nd label (B) reaches the cut position  
and is cut.  
B
(9) Feeds back to the home position  
- 115 -  
[C: Batch mode (Cut interval: 1, Issue count: 2)]  
“With automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode  
Cut position  
Head position  
(1) Idling  
(2) End of printing 1st label (A)  
(3) Feeds to the cut position  
A
A
(4) The 1st label (A) reaches the cut position  
and is cut.  
A
(5) Feeds back to the head position and start to  
print the 2nd label (B) .  
B
B
(6) End of printing 2nd label (B)  
(7) Feeds to the cut position  
B
(8) The 2nd label (B) reaches the cut position  
and is cut.  
B
(9) Feeds back to the home position  
(10) 10-mm automatic forward feed  
after 3 seconds (Reserved for future)  
- 116 -  
[D: Strip mode (Issue count: 3)]  
Strip position Head position  
(1) Idling  
(2) Feeds back to the home position  
(3) End of printing 1st label (A)  
(4) Removes 1st label (A)  
A
B
C
(5) Feeds back to the home position  
(6) End of printing 2nd label (B)  
(7) Removes 2nd label (B)  
(8) Feeds back to the home position  
(9) End of printing 3rd label (C)  
* The next label is not printed until the printed  
label is removed.  
- 117 -  
(5) Issue speed  
• Printing takes place at the designated speed.  
• The possible issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper  
supply. For details, refer to the Supply Specification.  
Model  
B-SV4D  
Parameter  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
2”/sec  
3”/sec  
4”/sec  
5”/sec  
- 118 -  
(6) Tag rotation  
The origin of coordinates and printing direction vary according to the designation of  
tag rotation.  
Printing bottom first  
Black mark  
(Back side of print)  
Backing paper  
Label  
Tag  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Label  
pitch  
Tag  
pitch  
Effective  
print length  
Effective  
print length  
S a m p l  
e
S a m p l  
e
Effective  
Effective  
print width  
print width  
X
X
0
0
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
Y
Y
[Labels]  
[Tags]  
Printing top first  
Black mark  
(Back side of print)  
Backing paper  
Label  
Tag  
Label  
pitch  
Tag  
pitch  
Effective  
print length  
Effective  
print length  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Effective  
print width  
Effective  
print width  
Y
0
Y
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
0
X
X
[Labels]  
[Tags]  
- 119 -  
Mirror printing bottom first  
Black mark  
(Back side of print)  
Backing paper  
Label  
Tag  
Origin of  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Label  
pitch  
Tag  
Effective  
print length  
Effective  
print length  
pitch  
Effective  
Effective  
print width  
print width  
X
X
0
0
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
Y
Y
[Labels]  
[Tags]  
Mirror printing top first  
Black mark  
(Back side of print)  
Backing paper  
Label  
Tag  
Label  
pitch  
Tag  
Effective  
print length  
Effective  
print length  
pitch  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Effective  
print width  
Effective  
print width  
Y
Y
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
0
0
X
X
[Labels]  
[Tags]  
- 120 -  
(7) Status response  
When the option with status response has been selected, a status response is  
made at the end of printing or if an error occurs.  
In batch mode and cut mode, the print end status response is made after printing  
on the designated number of labels.  
In strip mode, the status response is made after printing one label.  
* Do not change the parameter for status response/no status response during  
printing. Otherwise the status response may not be performed properly.  
Examples  
• Issue count:  
• Cut interval:  
• Paper:  
4 pieces  
1 piece  
Tag paper (Reflective  
sensor used)  
Cut issue  
41.0  
mm  
S a m p l e  
76.2  
mm  
• Issue mode:  
• Issue speed:  
• Ribbon:  
73.2  
mm  
8”/sec.  
With  
• Status response: On  
15.0 mm  
82.0 mm  
Paper feed direction  
[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C8201 [LF] [NUL]  
- 121 -  
Notes  
(1) Explanation of processes involved to stop the label at the home position after the  
head-open state is detected:  
When the gap between labels (black mark) is found after the head open state is  
detected, the value to stop at the home position of each label between the head  
and the sensor is set again.  
Stop position  
Sensor  
A
B
C
77 mm  
92 mm  
• The paper is moved in the above state.  
Stop position  
Sensor  
A
B
C
• Stop position after feeding one label  
Stop position  
Sensor  
+15 mm after detection  
of gap between B and C  
A
B
C
D
* However, an error will result when feed jam conditions are met.  
Paper feed direction  
(2) Any cut or strip issue commands should not be sent to the printer on which the  
cutter or strip module is not installed.  
- 122 -  
6.3.14 FEED COMMAND  
[ESC] T  
Function  
Format  
Term  
Feeds the paper.  
[ESC] Tabcde [LF] [NUL]  
a:  
Type of sensor  
0: No sensor  
1: Reflective sensor  
2: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)  
3: Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels)  
4: Reflective sensor  
b:  
c:  
Selects cut or non-cut  
0: Non-cut  
1: Cut  
Feed mode  
C: Batch mode (Cut and feed when “Cut” is selected for parameter b.)  
D: Strip mode  
E: Strip mode  
(with back feed)  
(Reserved for future)  
d:  
Feedspeed  
1: 2 inches/sec  
2: 2 inches/sec  
3: 3 inches/sec  
4: 4 inches/sec  
5: 5 inches/sec  
6: 5 inches/sec  
7: 5 inches/sec  
8: 5 inches/sec  
9: 5 inches/sec  
A: 5 inches/sec  
e: With/without ribbon  
Ignore  
Explanation  
(1) Type of sensor  
No sensor:  
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size  
Set Command.  
Reflective sensor:  
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size  
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag  
paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the stop position is  
finely adjusted.  
Transmissive sensor (when using normal labels):  
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size  
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the  
transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted.  
- 123 -  
Transmissive sensor (when using preprinted labels):  
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size  
Set Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the  
transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted according to the  
value set by the threshold set operation (key operation).  
Reflective sensor (when using a manual threshold value)  
Feeding takes place according to the parameters designated by the Label Size  
Set Command. However, the black mark provided on the back of the tag  
paper is automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper position is  
finely adjusted for every piece, according to the value set by the threshold set  
operation (key operation).  
(2) Cut/non-cut  
This option is valid in batch feed mode only. (Non-cut is selected in strip mode.)  
If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 3 seconds after cut-feeding  
when “with automatic forward feed standby” is set in the system mode, the printer  
automatically performs a 10-mm forward feed.  
When the Feed Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the  
printer performs a reverse feed to the original position.  
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.  
For cutting the label having label pitch of 38 mm or less, refer to the section  
regarding the Position Fine Adjustment Command.  
(3) Feed mode  
[C: Batch (Non-cut)]  
Head position  
(1) Place paper.  
(2) End of feed  
(Completes feeding to the top of form and stops)  
[C: Batch (Cut)]  
“Without automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode.  
Cut position Head position  
(1) Place paper.  
(2) End of feed (Completes feeding to the top of form)  
(3) Feeds to the cut position.  
(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.  
(5) Feeds back to the home position.  
- 124 -  
[C: Batch (Cut)]  
“With automatic forward feed standby” selected in the system mode.  
Cut position Head position  
(1) Place paper.  
(2) End of feed (Completes feeding to the top of form)  
(3) Feeds to the cut position.  
(4) Cuts unnecessary paper.  
(5) Feeds back to the home position.  
(6) 10-mm automatic forward feed after 3 seconds  
(Reserved for future)  
[D: Strip]  
Strip position Head position  
(1) Place paper.  
(2) Feeds back to the home position.  
(3) Feeding starts  
(4) End of feed  
(Completes feeding to the top of form and stops)  
* If a label is not removed, a feed is performed.  
- 125 -  
(4) Feed speed  
• A feed is performed at the designated speed.  
However, the back feed speed in the cut mode or the strip mode is 3”/sec.  
• The possible issue speed varies according to types and sizes of the paper  
supply.  
For details, refer to the Supply Specification.  
Model  
B-SV4D  
Parameter  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
2”/sec  
3”/sec  
4”/sec  
5”/sec  
Notes  
(1) If a change of label size or type of sensor, feed fine adjustment, cut position fine  
adjustment (or strip position fine adjustment) or back feed fine adjustment is  
made, one label must be fed to adjust the first print position prior to printing.  
(2) The parameter of the Feed Command is protected in memory (even if the power is  
turned off).  
(3) When “status response made” is selected in the Issue Command parameter  
setting, a status response is made after the end of feed or when an error occurs.  
(4) For explanation about the process to stop the label at the home position, refer to  
the section regarding the Issue Command.  
(5) If no subsequent command is received from the PC after the last label has been  
fed, the printer automatically performs a 14.7-mm forward feed is selected and  
“with automatic forward feed standby” is selected in the system mode. When the  
Feed Command is received during the forward feed standby, the printer feeds the  
label in reverse to the original position.  
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.  
- 126 -  
Examples  
41.0  
mm  
76.2 mm  
S a m p l e  
73.2  
mm  
15.0 mm  
82.0 mm  
Paper feed direction  
[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] AX; +010, +000, +10 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] T11C30 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C3001 [LF] [NUL]  
- 127 -  
6.3.15 EJECT COMMAND  
[ESC] IB  
Function  
Ejects (cuts) the label presently remaining between the head and the cutter and returns  
to the original position.  
Format  
Notes  
[ESC] IB [LF] [NUL]  
If no subsequent command is received from the PC for 3 seconds after ejection, the  
printer automatically performs a 10-mm forward feed when “with automatic forward feed  
standby” is selected in the system mode.  
When the Eject Command is received in the forward feed standby state, the printer  
feeds the label in reverse to the original position and ejects it.  
* For notes, refer to the section regarding the Issue Command.  
Examples  
Cut position  
Head position  
(1) Idling  
A
(2) End of printing 1st label (A)  
(3) End of printing 2nd label (B)  
(4) End of printing 3rd label (C)  
A
B
B
A
B
C
A
B
C
(5) Feeds to the cut position by the  
Eject Command  
A
C
(6) End of cutting  
(7) Since non-stop cut is performed,  
paper is fed over the cut position.  
(8) Feeds back to home position.  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; A [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0001C3001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] IB [LF] [NUL]  
- 128 -  
6.3.16 FORWARD/REVERSE FEED COMMAND  
[ESC] U1, [ESC] U2  
Function  
Format  
After printing or feeding the paper, feeds the paper to a manually cut position.  
When issuing the next label, feeds the paper back to the first printing position.  
Forward Feed  
[ESC] U1; aaaa [LF] [NUL]  
Reverse Feed  
[ESC] U2; aaaa [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aaaa:  
Feed value by which the paper is fed forward or backward.  
0030 to 2000 (in 0.1 mm units)  
Notes  
(1) When the [FEED] key is pressed on the printer, one label is fed, and then fed by the  
forward feed value automatically if the Forward Feed Command has already been  
transmitted.  
(2) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is protected in memory (even if the power is  
turned off).  
(3) The Forward/Reverse Feed Command is ignored in strip mode and cut issue  
mode.  
(4) The forward feed is performed at the speed designated in the Issue Command or  
Feed Command.  
.
- 129 -  
Examples  
Cut position  
Head position  
(1) Idling  
(2) Feeds one label  
(3) Feeds to the position at which a  
label can be cut manually.  
(4) Cut manually.  
(5) Standby  
(6) Feeds back to the home position  
(7) Prints three A labels  
A
A
A
A
A
A
(8) Feeds to the position at which  
labels can be cut manually.  
A
A
A
(9) Cut manually.  
(10) Standby  
(11) Feeds back to home position  
(12) Prints one B label  
B
B
(13) Feeds to the position at which  
a label can be cut manually.  
B
(14) Cut manually.  
(15) Standby  
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]  
Cut manually.  
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; A [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0003, 0002C3001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]  
Cut manually.  
[ESC] U2; 0120 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] U1; 0120 [LF] [NUL]  
- 130 -  
6.3.17 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND  
[ESC] XF  
Function  
Format  
Term  
Allocates the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board.  
[ESC] XF; aa, bb [, cc] [, Ed] [LF] [NUL]  
aa: Size of the TrueType font storage area  
00 to 03 (0 KB to 192 KB)  
(in units of 64 KB)  
bb: Size for bit map writable character storage area  
00 to 03 (0 KB to 192 KB)  
(in units of 64 KB)  
cc: Size for BASIC file storage area  
00 to 03 (0 KB to 192 KB)  
(in units of 64 KB)  
Ed: Indicates where the upper files are stored.  
d:  
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board  
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
Explanation  
(1) The storage area in flash ROM on the CPU board has a total capacity of 192 KB.  
If the memory board is available, the stored area increases as followings.  
1MB: 00 to 16 (0 KB to 1024 KB)  
2MB: 00 to 32 (0 KB to 2024 KB)  
3MB: 00 to 48 (0 KB to 3072 KB)  
4MB: 00 to 64 (0 KB to 4096 KB)  
6MB: 00 to 96 (0 KB to 6144 KB)  
8MB: 00 to 99 (0 KB to 8192 KB)  
(2) If this command is received, the complete area in flash ROM on the CPU / memory  
board is cleared.  
(3) If this command is not sent, the storage area in flash ROM on the CPU / memory  
board cannot be used.  
(4) The storage areas are allocated in the following order – the TrueType font storage  
area, the bit map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area.  
After these storage areas are allocated, the remaining area is used for the PC save  
area.  
(5) If the sum of the TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage  
area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, is 192 KB, the  
TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage area, and the  
BASIC file storage area are allocated as specified. However, the PC save area is  
not allocated.  
(6) If the sum of TrueType font storage area, the bit map writable character storage  
area, and the BASIC file storage area, specified by this command, exceeds 192  
KB, the TrueType font storage area is allocated first, as specified. Then, the  
remaining area is allocated to the bit map writable character storage area. If there  
is remaining area after the TrueType font storage area and the bit map writable  
character storage area are allocated, it is used for the BASIC file storage area. The  
PC save area is not allocated.  
- 131 -  
(7) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for the TrueType font storage area, the bit map  
writable character storage area, or the BASIC file storage area, the storage area is  
not allocated.  
(8) When “192” (192 KB) is specified for any of the TrueType font storage area, the bit  
map writable character storage area, and the BASIC file storage area, all storage  
areas are used. Therefore, other storage areas cannot be allocated. For example,  
if “192” is specified for the TrueType Font storage area, all storage areas are used  
for the TrueType Font storage area. The bit map writable character storage area,  
the BASIC file storage area, and the PC save area cannot be allocated.  
Refer to  
Example  
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)  
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)  
• Memory Card Format Command ([ESC] J1)  
• 2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command ([ESC] XE)  
The TrueType font storage area and bit map writable character storage area are set to  
64 KB and 64 KB, respectively.  
(PC save area: 192 KB - 64KB - 64 KB = 64 KB)  
[ESC] XF; 01, 01 [LF] [NUL]  
- 132 -  
6.3.18 MEMORY BOARD FORMAT COMMAND  
[ESC] J1  
Function  
Format  
Formats (initializes) the flash memory board for storage.  
[ESC] J1; a (, b) [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
a: Formatting (initializing) range for flash memory  
A: All area  
B: PC save area  
C: Bitmap writable character storage area  
D: True Type area  
E: Basic file area (Reserved for future)  
b: Drive (Omissible, If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU board is selected.)  
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board  
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
Explanation  
(1) 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 MB flash memory board can be formatted.  
(2) The flash memory board can be roughly divided into the PC save area and the  
writable character storage area. They can be formatted (initialized) either  
separately or at the same time.  
(3) When using a new flash memory board, the area to be used must be formatted  
(initialized) before the PC interface command is saved or writable characters are  
stored.  
(4) After formatting the flash memory board, the remaining memory is the PC save area  
and writable character storage area.  
(5) When the flash memory board is used and the already stored data (PC interface  
commands, writable characters, logos) is stored again, memory is consumed with  
every storing unless the Format Command ([ESC] J1) is transmitted.  
(6) When performing the label issue operation after sending the Memory Board Format  
Command, the image buffer is automatically cleared.  
(7) When storing of writable characters, logos, or PC interface commands is not  
continued, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation)  
after about 10 seconds. In this case, the image buffer is automatically cleared.  
Refer to  
Example  
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)  
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)  
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)  
[ESC] J1; A, 1 [LF] [NUL]  
- 133 -  
6.3.19 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND  
[ESC] XE  
Function  
Sets the code range when a 2-byte writable character code is stored in flash ROM on  
the CPU board or the flash memory board.  
Format  
Term  
[ESC] XE;(Sj, cc,)a1a1a1a1, b1b1b1b1, a2a2a2a2, b2b2b2b2 ---, anananan, bnbnbnbn [LF] [NUL]  
Sj, cc,: Drive and Writable character set (Omissible, If omitted, flash ROM on the CPU  
board and writable character set “51” are selected.)  
0, 51:  
Flash ROM on the CPU board  
Writable character code 51  
1,51 to 55:  
Flash ROM on the memory board  
Writable character code 51 to 55  
aaaa:  
bbbb:  
First character code for each range  
2020 to FFFF (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)  
No. of characters for each range  
0001 to 4000 (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)  
Explanation  
(1) For a 2-byte character code such as Kanji, the character code range may be  
divided into two or more. The control information area for the unnecessary code  
can be deleted by designating the character code range, and the capacity of flash  
memory is not wasted.  
(2) The total number of characters for each range must not exceed 0x4000 (16384  
characters).  
(3) Up to 2700 can be designated for the range.  
(4) A character code which is not appropriate for the setting for this command cannot  
be stored.  
Refer to  
Example  
• Memory Card Format Command ([ESC] J1)  
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)  
In the case that Shift JIS 8140H to 83DFH:  
Character data is present.  
Character data is not present.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
8140  
:
81F0  
:
8240  
:
82F0  
:
8340  
:
83D0  
[ESC] XE; 8140, 00BD, 8240, 00B7, 8340, 00BD [LF] [NUL]  
- 134 -  
6.3.20 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND  
[ESC] XD  
Function  
Format  
Writes writable characters and logos in the flash memory board, or flash ROM on the  
CPU board.  
For the flash memory board or flash ROM on the CPU board  
[ESC] XD; (Sj, ) aa, b, ccc, ddd, eee, fff, ggg, h, iii ------ iii [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
Sj: Drive  
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board  
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
aa:  
Writable character set  
• Flash memory board or Flash ROM on the CPU board  
01 to 40  
51 to 55 (2-byte code character)  
b(b): Writable character code  
• Flash memory board or Flash ROM on the CPU board  
20H to FFH (Set in hex.)  
40H to 7EH, 80H to FCH (When the writable character set is 41 to 44)  
2020H to FFFFH (When the writable character set is 51 to 55)  
ccc:  
ddd:  
eee:  
fff:  
Left offset  
000 to 719 (in dots)  
Top offset  
000 to 719 (in dots)  
Character width  
001 to 720 (in dots)  
Character height  
001 to 720 (in dots)  
- 135 -  
ggg:  
h:  
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing  
000 to 999 (in dots)  
Type of writable character data  
0: Nibble mode (4 bits/byte)  
1: Hex. mode (8 bits/byte)  
iii --- iii: Writable character data to be stored  
*
If each parameter for left offset, top offset, character width, character height, and  
horizontal spacing/proportional spacing is fixed as “000”, the setting is ignored when  
the writable character set is 41 to 44,  
Explanation  
(1) Type of writable character  
Up to 40 and 49 writable character sets can be stored for the memory board,  
respectively. However, the maximum number of characters varies depending on  
the writable character size and number of characters because of the limited  
memory capacity. For writable character sets 41 to 44, each writable character  
size is fixed.  
(2) Character code  
Up to 224 characters can be stored per character set. The maximum number of  
characters is 40 sets × 224 characters = 8960 characters. It varies depending on  
the writable character size and number of characters because of the limited  
memory capacity. For character sets 41 to 44, a character code consisting of 1  
byte is stored. However, when the character code is called up, F0H is added to  
the upper digit of it, and consists of 2 bytes. In this case, up to 188 characters can  
be stored per character set.  
(3) 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 MB memory board can be used for storing a writable character.  
(4) The configuration of the writable character file stored in the memory board is as  
follows.  
1st byte  
2nd byte  
3rd byte  
4th byte  
5th byte  
6th byte  
7th byte  
8th byte  
9th byte  
10th byte  
11th byte  
No. of dots for left offset  
(from upper to lower)  
No. of dots for top offset  
(from upper to lower)  
No. of dots for character height  
(from upper to lower)  
No. of dots for character width  
(from upper to lower)  
No. of dots for horizontal spacing/proportional spacing  
(from upper to lower)  
Writable character data (Hex. data)  
(If it is stored in the nibble mode, data is 8 bits/byte.)  
- 136 -  
1-byte writable character  
0100  
W/C = Writable character  
01000020. UDF (W/C file for character code 20H)  
01000021. UDF (W/C file for character code 21H)  
01000022. UDF (W/C file for character code 22H)  
Memory board  
(Writable character 41)  
0101  
(Writable character 42)  
0102 Each W/C file  
(Writable character 43)  
Each W/C file  
010000FD. UDF (W/C file for character code FDH)  
010000FE. UDF (W/C file for character code FEH)  
010000FF. UDF (W/C file for character code FFH)  
0126  
(Writable character 39)  
0127 Each W/C file  
Each W/C file  
(Writable character 40)  
Writable character with Kanji size  
001A  
001A0040. UDF (W/C file for character code 40H)  
001A0041. UDF (W/C file for character code 41H)  
(Writable character 41)  
001B  
(Writable character 42)  
001C Each W/C file  
(Writable character 43)  
001D Each W/C file  
Each W/C file  
001A007E. UDF (W/C file for character code 7EH)  
001A0080. UDF (W/C file for character code 80H)  
001A0081. UDF (W/C file for character code 81H)  
(Writable character 44)  
001A00FC. UDF (W/C file for character code FCH)  
2-byte writable character  
0200  
02002020. UDF (W/C file for character code 2020H)  
02002021. UDF (W/C file for character code 2021H)  
02002022. UDF (W/C file for character code 2022H)  
(Writable character 51)  
0201  
(Writable character 52)  
0202 Each W/C file  
(Writable character 53)  
0203 Each W/C file  
(Writable character 54)  
0204 Each W/C file  
(Writable character 55)  
Each W/C file  
0200FFFD. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFDH)  
0200FFFE. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFEH)  
0200FFFF. UDF (W/C file for character code FFFFH)  
• How to assign the directory name for a writable character set  
Directory name for writable character 01  
Directory name for writable character 02  
“0100”  
“0101”  
Directory name for writable character 39  
Directory name for writable character 40  
Directory name for writable character 41  
“0126”  
“0127”  
“001A”  
Directory name for writable character 44  
Directory name for writable character 51  
“001D”  
“0200”  
Directory name for writable character 55  
• How to assign the file name  
“0204”  
0100 0022. UDF (Writable character 40: writable character file for character code 22H)  
Identifier indicating the writable character file  
Character code (2-byte code: Code 22H)  
Writable character set (Writable character 40: Same as the directory name)  
- 137 -  
(6)  
Top  
offset  
22 dots  
Char.  
height  
31 dots  
Base line  
Reference  
point  
Reference point  
of next char.  
Left  
offset  
Char. width  
26 dots  
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing  
30 dots  
(7) Writable character set: 01 to 40, 51 to 55  
Char. width 26 dots  
Nibble mode  
1
9
30H  
2
30H  
3
30H  
4
3FH  
5
3CH  
6
30H  
7
30H  
8
30H  
3FH 10 3CH 11 37H  
Char.  
height  
31 dots  
240  
30H  
241 3FH 242 3FH 243 3FH 244 3CH 245 30H 246 30H 247 30H 248 30H  
Hex. mode  
1
5
00H  
2
6
0FH  
7FH  
3
C0H  
4
00H  
FCH  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
120  
00H  
241 FFH 242 FCH 243 00H 244 00H  
- 138 -  
[Nibble mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the  
following order (1 248). (High order digit: “3”)  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.  
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as  
data 0.  
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:  
Data count of writable characters to be stored =  
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots × 2  
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.  
[Hex. mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in  
the following order (1 124).  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.  
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as  
data 0.  
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:  
Data count of writable characters to be stored =  
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots  
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.  
Notes  
(1) With the same writable character set designated, character width and character height can be  
designated for each writable character code. In other words, character size can be changed  
for each character, thus saving memory.  
(2) Proportional spacing and descending characters are possible depending on the parameters of  
horizontal spacing/proportional spacing, left offset, and top offset.  
(3) When top offset is 000, the reference coordinates are at the above left when drawing because  
the base line is at the top. (Coordinate setting is facilitated for logos.)  
- 139 -  
(8) Writable character set: 41 (16×16 dots )  
Nibble mode  
Character width 16 dots  
1
5
30H  
30H  
2
6
30H  
31H  
3
30H  
38H  
4
30H  
7
Character  
height  
16 dots  
58 31H 59 38H 60 30H  
61 30H 62 30H 63 30H 64 30H  
Hex. mode  
4
4
4
4
1
5
00H  
01H  
2
6
00H  
80H  
3
01H  
01H  
4
80H  
8
8
7
26 80H 27 01H 28 80H  
29 01H 30 80H 31 00H 32 00H  
[Nibble mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the  
following order (1 64). (High order digit: “3”)  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.  
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 64 bytes.  
[Hex. mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in  
the following order (1 32).  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.  
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 32 bytes.  
* When writable character 41 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 16  
dots.  
- 140 -  
(9) Writable character set: 42 (24×24 dots )  
Character width 24 dots  
Nibble mode  
1
7
30H  
30H  
2
8
30H  
30H  
3
9
30H  
33H  
4
30H  
5
30H  
6
30H  
Character  
height  
24 dots  
137  
30H  
138  
30H  
139 30H 140 30H 141 30H 142 30H 143 30H 144 30H  
Hex. mode  
1
4
00H  
00H  
2
5
00H  
3
6
00H  
00H  
4
4
4
4
4
4
3CH  
8
8
8
67 00H 68 3CH 69 00H  
70 00H 71 00H 72 00H  
[Nibble mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the  
following order (1 144). (High order digit: “3”)  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.  
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 144 bytes.  
[Hex. mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in  
the following order (1 72).  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.  
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 72 bytes.  
* When writable character 42 is designated, the width and height of the character are both  
24 dots.  
- 141 -  
(10) Writable character set: 43 (32×32 dots)  
Character width 32 dots  
Nibble mode  
1
8
30H  
30H  
2
9
30H  
3
30H  
4
30H  
5
30H  
6
30H  
7
30H  
30H 10 30H 11 30H 12 37H  
Character  
height  
32 dots  
248  
30H  
249  
30H  
250 30H 251 30H 252 30H 253 30H 254 30H 255 30H 256 30H  
Hex. mode  
1
5
00H  
00H  
2
6
00H  
07H  
3
C0H  
C0H  
4
00H  
7
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
123  
C0H  
124  
00H  
8
8
8
8
125 00H 126 00H 127 00H 128 00H  
[Nibble mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the  
following order (1 256). (High order digit: “3”)  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.  
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 256 bytes.  
[Hex. mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in  
the following order (1 128).  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.  
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 128 bytes.  
* When writable character 43 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 32  
dots.  
- 142 -  
(11) Writable character set: 44 (48×48 dots)  
Character width 48 dots  
Nibble mode  
1
7
30H  
30H  
2
8
30H  
30H  
3
9
30H  
4
30H  
5
30H  
6
30H  
30H 10 30H  
569  
30H  
570  
30H  
571 30H 572 30H 573 30H 574 30H 575 30H 576 30H  
Character  
height  
48 dots  
Nibble mode  
1
7
00H  
00H  
2
8
00H  
00H  
3
9
00H  
4
00H  
5
00H  
6
00H  
07H 10 E0H  
281  
00H  
282  
00H  
283 00H 284 00H 285 00H 286 00H 287 00H 288 00H  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
8
8
8
8
[Nibble mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in the  
following order (1 576). (High order digit: “3”)  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.  
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 576 bytes.  
[Hex. mode]  
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in  
the following order (1 288).  
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.  
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 288 bytes.  
* When writable character 44 is designated, the width and height of the character are both 48  
dots.  
- 143 -  
Notes  
(1) No matter what character set or character code is selected, no memory will be  
wasted.  
(2) When a new writable character is stored, the Flash Memory board Format  
Command ([ESC] J1) must be transmitted.  
(3) A character code already stored can be stored in the flash memory board again if  
the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) is transmitted, but memory will be  
consumed with every storage. Memory can be efficiently used by sending the  
Format Command ([ESC] J1) before storing.  
(4) If a flash memory card is used, and a label issue operation is performed after  
sending the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD), the image buffer is  
cleared automatically.  
(5) When the storing operation stops after storing the writable character and logos, the  
printer automatically enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10  
seconds. In this case, when the flash memory board is used, the image buffer will  
be cleared automatically.  
Refer to  
Flash Memory Board Format Command ([ESC] J1)  
- 144 -  
Examples  
Writable character set:  
03  
Writable character code 70H  
Top  
offset  
22 dots  
Char.  
height  
31 dots  
Base line  
Reference  
point of next  
char.  
Reference  
point  
Left offset  
2 dots  
Char. width 26 dots  
Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing  
30 dots  
[ESC] J1; C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XD; 03, p, 002, 022, 026, 031, 030, 0, 000?<000?<7??800?<???<00?=?03>001?  
<00?001?8007001?0007801>0003801>0003<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01>0  
001<01>0003<01>0003801?0007801?800?001?<01?001=?07>001<???<001<7??8001<0?<  
0001<0000001<0000001<0000001<000000???<0000???<0000???<0000 [LF] [NUL]  
* 30H = ”0”  
31H = ”1”  
32H = ”2”  
33H = ”3”  
34H = ”4”  
35H = ”5”  
36H = ”6”  
37H = ”7”  
38H = ”8”  
39H = ”9”  
3AH = ”:”  
3BH = ”;”  
3CH = ”<”  
3DH = ”=”  
3EH = ”>”  
3FH = ”?”  
- 145 -  
6.3.21 GRAPHIC COMMAND  
[ESC] SG  
Function  
Format  
Draws graphic data.  
[ESC] SG; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]  
or  
[ESC] SG0; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, ffff, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aaaa:  
bbbb:  
cccc:  
Print origin of X-coordinate for drawing graphic data  
Fixed as 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
Print origin of Y-coordinate for drawing graphic data  
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)  
No. of graphic width dots  
Fixed as 4 digits (in dots)  
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected, this  
designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is contained in  
the graphic data.)  
dddd:  
No. of graphic height dots  
4 or 5 digits (in dots)  
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected, this  
designation is ignored. (The information of the graphic width is contained in  
the graphic data.)  
When “3: TOPIX compression mode” is selected for the type of graphic data:  
Resolution of graphic data:  
*only two types  
0150: 150 DPI (The data is drawn in double resolution.)  
0300: 300 DPI (The data is drawn in single resolution.)  
e:  
Type of graphic data  
[ESC] SG; -- command:  
0: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing  
1: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte)  
Overwrite drawing  
2: BMP file mode (monochrome bmp) Overwrite drawing  
3: TOPIX compression mode Overwrite drawing  
4: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) OR drawing  
5: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte)  
OR drawing  
6: PCX file mode (monochrome pcx) Overwrite drawing  
[ESC] SG0; -- command:  
A: Printer driver compression mode  
Overwrite drawing  
ffff:  
Data count (Effective only for [ESC] SG0; -- command)  
Fixed as 4 digits  
Represents the total number of bytes for the compressed graphic data by 32  
bits in Hex.  
Range: 0 to 4,294,967,295 bytes  
(00H, 00H, 00H, 00H to FFH, FFH, FFH, FFH)  
ggg --- ggg: Graphic data  
- 146 -  
Explanation  
(1) When the graphic data “0”, “1”, “2”, “3”, “6”, or “A” is selected, the graphic data is  
drawn by overwriting the image buffer.  
(2) When the graphic data “4” or “5” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by carrying  
out OR between the graphic data and the data in the image buffer.  
Backing paper  
Label  
Backing paper  
Label  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Print origin of  
coordinates  
Graphic  
height dots  
Effective  
print length  
Effective  
print length  
Graphic  
height dots  
Print origin of  
coordinates  
Origin of  
coordinates  
(0, 0)  
Graphic width  
dots  
Graphic width  
dots  
Effective  
Effective  
print width  
print width  
X
Y
0
Paper feed direction  
Paper feed direction  
Y
X
0
[Print direction: Printing bottom first]  
[Print direction: Printing top first]  
- 147 -  
Print origin of  
coordinates  
Graphic width 19 dots  
Nibble mode  
1
7
30H  
30H  
2
8
30H  
30H  
3
33H  
4
30H  
5
30H  
6
30H  
Graphic  
height  
22 dots  
126  
30H  
127 33H 128 3FH 129 30H 130 30H 131 30H 132 30H  
Hex. mode  
1
4
00H  
00H  
2
5
30H  
3
00H  
38H  
4
4
4
4
4
4
63 00H  
64 3FH 65 00H 66 00H  
8
8
8
[Nibble mode]  
(1) The graphic data is separated into four dot units and sent in the following  
order (1 132). (High order digit: “3”)  
(2) The graphic data is 30H to 3FH.  
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are  
transmitted as data 0.  
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:  
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic  
height dots × 2  
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.  
[Hex. mode]  
(1) The graphic data is separated into eight dot units and sent in the following  
order (1 66).  
(2) The graphic data is 00H to FFH.  
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are  
transmitted as data 0.  
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:  
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic  
height dots  
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.  
- 148 -  
[When TOPIX compression mode is selected]  
Range for length  
First line  
Second line  
Graphic data  
Length L1  
L1  
L2  
L3  
(1) Length: Total number of bytes of the graphic data (0001H ~ )  
0 0 1 4  
Ex. Length = 20 bytes:  
(2) L1 parameter: Shows in which large block (512 dots/block) the changed data is contained.  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L1  
0: Not present  
1: Present  
512 dots 512 dots 512 dots  
(3) L2 parameter: Shows in which medium block (64 dots/block) the changed data is contained  
(of the L1 large block).  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L2  
0: Not present  
1: Present  
64 dots  
64 dots  
64 dots  
(4) L3 parameter: Shows in which small block (8 dots/block) the changed data is contained (of  
the L2 medium block).  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
L3  
0: Not present  
1: Present  
8 dots  
8 dots  
8 dots  
Exclusive-OR is carried out between the current image data and the  
image data one line previous. Only the changed bit is set to ON (1). The  
alignment of dots is MSB (left dots) and LSB (right dots).  
*
The graphic width for only the smaller value of either the designated value or the max. buffer  
size (512 KB) is drawn. The minimum unit of the data drawing is 8 dots (1 byte). If the graphic  
width is set to 3 dots, it will be reset to 8 dots (1 byte).  
- 149 -  
[When the printer driver compression mode is selected]  
(1) For the [ESC] SG0; -- command, only “A: Printer driver compression mode” can be selected  
for the type of graphic data. The parameter for the data count is attached after the parameter  
for the type of graphic data. When the total number of data cannot be provided by the printer  
driver, “00H, 00H, 00H, 00H” should be specified for the number of graphic data. However,  
in this case, the printer diver cannot support printing through a serial interface (RS-232C).  
(2) How to compress data  
Compression is performed for every data of one line specified for the number of graphic  
width dots.  
The data is made up in units of 8 dots. A repeated value is encoded in 2 bytes. The first  
byte is a numeric value n indicating that a value is repeated (-n + 1) times.  
The range is between -127 and -1. The second byte is the repeated value.  
If a value is not repeated the first byte is the numeric value m. The length of the values is  
indicated in (m+1). The range of “m” is between 0 and 126. The length of the repetition of  
the value and ”m” should not exceed 127 and 126, respectively.  
If it exceeds the range, it should be divided into blocks of repetition.  
When the same contents as the data for 1 line appear repeatedly in the next line and after,  
the number of lines in which the same contents appear is encoded in 2 bytes. The first byte  
is fixed as 127. The second byte indicates “N” times that the same contents are repeated.  
Its range is between 1 and 255. “N” should not exceed 255. If it exceeds the range, the data  
for the excess number of times should be compressed as the new data of 1 line, and the  
remaining number of repetitions should be encoded.  
[Example]  
Data before being compressed (Width: 120 dots, Height: 300 lines)  
Line No.  
Graphic data  
1
2
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh  
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh  
299  
300  
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh  
AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh AAh BBh CCh DDh EEh FFh FFh FFh FFh  
Data after being compressed  
Line No.  
Graphic data  
1
FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FEh FFh  
2 to 256  
257  
7FH FFH  
FAh AAh 03h BBh CCh DDh EEh FDh FFh  
7FH 2BH  
258 to 300  
FDh = -3  
-(-3) + 1 = 4  
FFh is repeated 4 times.  
03h = 3  
3 + 1 = 4  
4-byte data (BBh CCh DDh EEh) without  
repetition  
FAh = -6  
-(-6) + 1 = 7  
AAh is repeated 7 times.  
- 150 -  
Notes  
(1) The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of drawing the graphic  
data will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command  
([ESC] D).  
(2) The number of graphic width dots and the number of graphic height dots must also  
be set so that the result of drawing the graphic data will be within the effective print  
area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D) in the same manner as the  
above.  
(3) Both width and height are 8 dots/mm.  
(4) The actual result of drawing may deviate within ±0.33 mm in the X direction with  
respect to the designated print origin of the X-coordinate.  
To draw the received graphic data at high speed, the data is directly  
developed in the image buffer without applying correction to each bit with  
respect to the designated X-coordinate. Consequently, an error of up to 4  
bits occurs.  
[Effective print area]  
[mm]  
Model  
B-SV4D  
Strip  
Item  
Method  
Batch  
8.0  
Cutter  
13.0  
Effective print width  
Min.  
13.0  
Max.  
108 ± 0.2  
Effective  
print length  
Min.  
23.4  
Label  
Max.  
Min.  
607.6  
8.0  
Tag  
13.0  
Max.  
607.6  
607.6  
- 151 -  
Examples  
10.0 mm  
Origin  
(0, 0)  
24.0 mm  
Graphic width 19 dots  
Graphic  
height  
22 dots  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0022, 0, 003000003800003<00003>000037000033800031  
<00030<00030>00030600030>00030<00031<00033800?33003??0007??000???000??  
>000??>0007? <0003?0000 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
* 30H = “0”  
31H = “1”  
32H = “2”  
33H = “3”  
34H = “4”  
35H = “5”  
36H = “6”  
37H = “7”  
38H = “8”  
39H = “9”  
3AH = “:”  
3BH = “;”  
3CH = “<”  
3DH = “=”  
3EH = “>”  
3FH = “?”  
- 152 -  
[TOPIX compression mode]  
10.0 mm  
Origin  
(0, 0)  
24.0 mm  
Graphic width 19 dots  
Graphic  
height  
22 dots  
[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0300, 3, 00 5C 80 80 40 30  
Length L1 L2 L3 Data (1st line)  
80 80 40 08 80 80 40 04 80 80 40 02 80 80 40 09  
(2nd line) (3rd line) (4th line) (5th line)  
80 80 60 04 80 80 80 60 02 40 80 80 40 01 80 80 20 20  
(6th line) (7th line) (8th line) (9th line)  
80 80 20 80 80 80 20 80 80 80 20 20 80 80 40 01  
(10th line) (11th line) (12th line) (13th line)  
80 80 60 02 40 80 80 A0 0F 80 80 80 C0 30 C3 80 80 80 40  
(14th line) (15th line) (16th line) (17th line)  
80 80 80 80 80 80 40 10 00 80 80 C0 80 20 80 80 C0 40 C0 [LF] [NUL]  
(18th line) (19th line)(20th line) (21st line) (22nd line)  
- 153 -  
6.3.22 SAVE START COMMAND  
[ESC] XO  
Function  
Declares the start of saving PC interface commands.  
(Places the printer in the mode where PC interface commands are written in the flash  
ROM on the memory board, or flash ROM on the CPU board.)  
Format  
Term  
[ESC] XO; aa, (Sb, ) c [LF] [NUL]  
aa: Identification number to be used for saving in the flash memory board or calling  
01 to 99  
dddddddd: Ignore  
Sb: Drive in which the PC interface command is stored  
b: Drive  
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board  
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
c: Status response at save time  
0: No status response made  
1: Status response made  
Explanation  
Notes  
(1) When the PC interface command is stored in the memory board, directory  
“PCSAVE” is created, and then the directory “Specified file name. PCS” is created  
under the “PCSAVE” directory level.  
(1) After sending the Save Start Command ([ESC] XO), any command other than the  
following will be saved into the flash memory board.  
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)  
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)  
• Saved Data Call Command ([ESC] XQ)  
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)  
• Reset Command ([ESC] WR)  
• Status Request Command ([ESC] WS)  
• Memory Board Format Command ([ESC] J1)  
(2) No error check is made for the commands at save time.  
Refer to  
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)  
• Memory Board Format Command ([ESC] J1)  
- 154 -  
Examples  
[ESC] J1; B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XO; 01, 0 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]  
- 155 -  
6.3.23 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND  
[ESC] XP  
Declares the termination of saving PC interface commands.  
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]  
Function  
Format  
Note  
If the storing operation is not continued after storing the PC interface command, the  
printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) after about 10 seconds. In this  
case, the image buffer will be cleared automatically.  
Refer to  
Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)  
- 156 -  
6.3.24 SAVED DATA CALL COMMAND  
[ESC] XQ  
Function  
Format  
Calls PC interface commands saved in the flash ROM on the memory board, or flash  
ROM on the CPU board.  
[ESC] XQ; aa, (Sb,) c, d [LF] [NUL]  
Term  
aa: Identification number of the file to be called from the flash memory board  
01 to 99  
dddddddd: Ignore  
Sb: Drive from which the command is called  
b: Drive  
0: Flash ROM on the CPU board  
1: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
2: Flash ROM on the memory board (Option)  
c:  
d:  
Status response when the data is called up  
0: No status response made  
1: Status response made  
Auto call at power on time  
L: Auto call (Always call 01 file with Auto call. Refer to Page 8 for cancel.)  
M: No auto call  
Notes  
(1) If the relevant save identifier is not found, an error will result.  
(2) However, if no save number subject to auto call is found with the option for auto  
call at power on time selected, the option for no auto call will be selected causing  
no error.  
(3) If a command error is found in the PC interface command in auto call at power on  
time by the Saved Data Call Command, a command error will result. After an error  
has occurred, the power must be turned off. The option for no auto call is selected  
when the power is turned on again.  
(4) The printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) when the Save Data Call  
Command is sent after the Save Terminate command.  
Refer to  
Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)  
Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)  
Examples  
[ESC] XQ; 01, 0, L [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] RC002; 100 [LF] [NUL]  
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]  
- 157 -  
6.3.25 RESET COMMAND  
[ESC] WR  
Function  
Format  
Returns the printer to its initial state.  
[ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]  
Explanation  
The printer is returned to the same state as when the power was turned on. When the  
printer receives this command during printing, it returns to its initial state after issuing the  
label which is being printed. The next command must not be sent while the printer is  
performing initial processing after this command is transmitted.  
Notes  
(1) The Reset Command is effective in serial interface (RS-232C), parallel port or  
USB port.  
(2) When the printer receives a command in system mode, only the Reset Command  
can be processed and any other command cannot be processed.  
(3) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset  
Command, the error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not  
displayed in system mode.  
(4) After the code of the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic  
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset Command is not processed until the  
printer receives the data specified for the type of data.  
Example  
[ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]  
- 158 -  
6.3.26 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND  
[ESC] WS  
Function  
Format  
Sends the printer status to the host computer.  
[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]  
Explanation  
This command makes the printer send its status regardless of the setting of “status  
response/no status response.” The status to be transmitted is the current printer status,  
and indicates the latest status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining count  
of the batch currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be  
printed is transmitted.  
Notes  
(1) This command is available only for the RS-232C and USB interfaces.  
(2) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.  
(3) After the code of the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic  
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not processed  
until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.  
(4) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after  
receiving the Status Request Command.  
(5) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next  
Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is  
less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command.  
Example  
[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]  
- 159 -  
6.3.27 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND  
[ESC] WB  
Function  
Sends information on the printer status and the free space of the receive buffer to the  
host computer.  
Format  
[ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]  
Explanation  
This command makes the printer send information on its status and free space of the  
receive buffer regardless of the setting of “status response/no status response.” The  
status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest status only.  
The remaining count indicates the remaining count of the batch currently being printed.  
No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted. Free space of the  
receive buffer for the interface which sent this command, is returned to the host.  
Status Format (23 bytes)  
SOH  
STX  
01H  
Indicates the top of the status block.  
Detailed status  
02H  
3XH  
3XH  
Status  
Status type  
33H Indicates the status requested by the WB command.  
3XH  
Remaining  
issue count  
3XH  
Remaining number of labels to be issued.  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH Total number of bytes of the status block.  
Length  
“30H30H”(0) ~ “39H39H”(99)  
Note: In case of this status format(23 bytes), This is “32H33H”.  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH  
3XH  
0DH  
0AH  
Free space of receive buffer  
“30H30H30H30H30H”(0 Kbyte) ~ “39H39H39H39H39H” (99999 Kbytes)  
Note: The maximum value must be the receive buffer capacity.  
Free space of  
receive buffer  
Receive buffer capacity  
“30H30H30H30H30H” (0 Kbyte) ~ “39H39H39H39H39H” (99999 Kbytes)  
Note: The maximum value differs depending on the models.  
Receive buffer  
capacity  
CR  
LF  
Indicates the end of the status block.  
- 160 -  
Notes  
(1) This command is available only for the RS-232C and USB interfaces.  
(2) The printer returns the status only for the interface which sent this command to the  
host.  
(3) After the code of the Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic  
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not processed  
until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.  
(4) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after  
receiving the Status Request Command.  
(5) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next  
Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is  
less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command.  
Example  
[ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]  
- 161 -  
6.3.28 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND  
[ESC] WV  
Function  
Format  
Sends information such as the program version of the printer.  
[ESC] WV [LF] [NUL]  
Explanation  
(1) The format of the program version data (total 27 bytes of data) to be returned to the  
host is as follows.  
SOH  
STX  
01H  
02H  
30H  
34H  
41H  
50H  
52H  
32H  
30H  
30H  
33H  
42H  
2DH  
34H  
38H  
30H  
44H  
20H  
56H  
31H  
2EH  
30H  
41H  
03H  
04H  
0DH  
0AH  
“0”  
“4”  
“A”  
“P”  
“R”  
“2”  
“0”  
“0”  
“3”  
“B”  
“-“  
Creation date of program:  
9 bytes of data indicated in order of Day-  
Month-Year  
Creation date  
“S”  
“V”  
“4”  
“D”  
SP  
“V”  
“1”  
“.”  
Model:  
Model  
7 bytes of ASCII code indicating model  
Program version:  
5 bytes of data: Vx.xx  
Revision  
Version  
“0”  
“A”  
Version  
ETX  
EOT  
CR  
LF  
(2) This command is one of the types of commands that is processed as it is received.  
Processing takes place starting from the ones received first. Until the process of  
the command previously sent is completed, the next command is not processed.  
Therefore, if the printer is not in the idle state when this command is sent, the  
program version data may not be returned immediately.  
Notes  
(1) This command is effective only for the serial interface (RS-232C).  
This command is not supported for a parallel interface (Centronics), since  
transmission cannot be performed in the parallel interface.  
- 162 -  
6.3.29 MEMORY BOARD INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WI  
Function  
Format  
Term  
Sends information regarding the use of the memory board to the host.  
[ESC] WI; a, b [LF] [NUL]  
a: Drive  
1: Slot 1  
2: Slot 1  
memory board (Option)  
memory board (Option)  
b: Information to be acquired  
A: Free space  
B: Bitmap  
C: Stored PC command save file  
D: TrueType  
E: Basic file (Reserved for future)  
Explanation  
(1) The format of information to be returned to the host is as follows:  
A: Free space  
SOH STX “A” Slot  
Free space (Kbyte)  
ETX EOT CR  
LF  
01H 02H 41H xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH  
Free space (in units of Kbytes):  
000000 (KB) to 999999 (KB)  
Slot:  
“1” (31H): Slot 1  
When the memory board is not inserted into a specified slot, “00H, 00H, 00H, 00H,  
00H, 00H” is returned for the free spaces.  
B: Writable character list  
Storage information for writable character  
SOH STX “B” Slot  
ETX EOT CR  
LF  
(55 bytes)  
01H 02H 42H xxH “0”/“1” “0”/“1” ········ “0”/“1” “0”/“1” 03H 04H 0DH 0AH  
Writable character No. 55  
Stored/Not stored  
Writable character No. 54  
Stored/Not stored  
Writable character No. 02  
Stored/Not stored  
Writable character No. 01  
Stored/Not stored  
Slot  
“0” (30H): Not stored  
“1” (31H): Slot 1  
“1” (31H): Stored  
If only one writable character is stored, information of the writable character No. is set to  
“1” (Stored). The storage information of a specified character code can be acquired by  
using the memory board Stored Writable Character Information Acquire Command  
([ESC] WG).  
The storage information for the writable character has a total of 55 bytes. The writable  
character No. is assigned from 01 to 44, and from 51 to 55. Therefore, bytes to which  
Nos. 45 to 50 are assigned are sure to be set to “0” (30H). When the memory board is  
not inserted in the specified slot, “00H” for the storage information for the writable  
character is returned.  
- 163 -  
C: Stored PC command save file  
Stored PC command save file name  
SOH STX “C” Slot  
ETX EOT CR  
LF  
01H 02H 43H xxH File name 1 00H File name 2 00H ··· File name n 00H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH  
File name (including expansion):  
“00H” should be placed between file  
names.  
Slot:  
“1” (31H): Slot 1  
In the following cases, 1 byte of “00H” is returned as the stored PC command save  
file name.  
There is no file.  
The memory board is not inserted in the specified slot.  
D: Stored True Type Font file  
Stored PC command save file name  
SOH STX “D” Slot  
ETX EOT CR  
LF  
01H 02H 43H xxH File name 1 00H File name 2 00H ··· File name n 00H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH  
File name (including expansion):  
“00H” should be placed between file  
names.  
Slot:  
“1” (31H): Slot 1  
In the following cases, 1 byte of “00H” is returned as the stored True Type Font file  
name.  
There is no file.  
The memory board is not inserted in the specified slot.  
(2) This command is one of the types of commands that is processed as it is received.  
Processing takes place starting from the ones received first. Until the process of  
the command previously sent is completed, this command is not processed.  
Therefore, if the printer is not in the idle state when this command is sent, the  
program version data may not be returned immediately.  
Note  
(1) This command is effective only for the serial interface (RS-232C).  
This command is not supported for a parallel interface (Centronics), since  
transmission cannot be performed in the parallel interface.  
- 164 -  
6.3.30 PRINTER INFORMATION STORE COMMAND  
[ESC] IG  
Function  
Format  
Term  
Sets the printer information.  
[ESC] IG; aaa --- aaabbb --- bbb [LF] [NUL]  
aaa --- aaa:  
bbb --- bbb:  
Model name (Fixed as 20 digits)  
20H to 7FH of ASCII codes  
Serial No. (Fixed as 11digits)  
20H to 7FH of ASCII codes  
Explanation  
(1) The model name and serial No. of the printer can be optionally stored. The  
character codes which can be set in each item are 20H to 7FH. If any code  
other than these is used, it is replaced with the space code.  
(2) The printer information has already been set when shipped.  
(3) The stored printer information is backed up in memory and is kept even if the  
power is turned off.  
(4) This stored information should be printed on test print.  
The following information is stored in the printer.  
Examples  
Model name:  
Serial No.:  
B-SV4D-GS10-QM  
2303A000001  
[ESC] IG; [42H] [2DH] [53H] [56H] [34H] [44H] [2DH] [47H] [53H] [31H] [30H] [2DH] [51H] [4DH] [20H]  
[20H] [20H] [20H] [20H] [20H] [32H] [33H] [30H] [33H] [41H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H]  
[31H] [LF] [NUL]  
Refer to  
Printer Information Request Command ([ESC] IR)  
- 165 -  
6.3.31 PRINTER INFORMATION REQUEST COMMAND  
[ESC] IR  
Function  
Format  
Retrieves the printer information.  
[ESC] IR [LF] [NUL]  
Explanation  
(1) The model name, serial No., and software version of the printer set by the  
Printer Information Store Command ([ESC] IG) is retrieved  
[Information field]  
Model name  
20 bytes  
Serial No.  
11 bytes  
Examples  
The following information is stored in the printer.  
Model name:  
Serial No.:  
B-SV4D-GS10-QM  
2303A000001  
Model name:  
[42H] [2DH] [53H] [56H] [34H] [44H] [2DH] [47H] [53H] [31H] [30H] [2DH] [51H] [4DH] [20H]  
[20H] [20H] [20H] [20H] [20H]  
Serial No.:  
Refer to  
[32H] [33H] [30H] [33H] [41H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [31H]  
Printer Information Store Command ([ESC] IG)  
- 166 -  
6.4 COMMANDS FOR SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR  
6.4.1 PARAMETER SET COMMAND  
[ESC] Z2; 1  
Function  
Format  
Term  
Sets each parameter on the printer.  
[ESC] Z2; 1, abcdefghijklmnopqqrst [LF] [NUL]  
a:  
Character code selection  
0: PC-850  
1: PC-852  
2: PC-857  
3: PC-8  
4: PC-851  
5: PC-855  
6: PC-1250  
7: PC-1251  
8: PC-1252  
9: PC-1253  
A: PC-1254  
B: PC-1257  
C: LATIN9  
D: Arabic  
b:  
c:  
Font “0” selection  
0: 0 (without slash)  
1: 0 (with slash)  
RS-232C communication speed  
0: 2400 bps  
1: 4800 bps  
2: 9600 bps  
3: 19200 bps  
4: 38400 bps  
5: 57600 bps  
d:  
e:  
f:  
RS-232C data length  
0: 7 bits  
1: 8 bits  
Stop bit length  
0: 1 bit  
1: 2 bits  
RS-232C parity check  
0: NONE  
1: EVEN  
2: ODD  
- 167 -  
g:  
RS-232C transmission control  
0: XON/XOFF protocol  
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the  
power is turned OFF)  
1: READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol  
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the  
power is turned OFF)  
2: XON/XOFF + READY/BUSY (DTR) protocol:  
(XON output when the power is turned on, XOFF output when the power is  
turned OFF)  
3: XON/XOFF protocol:  
(XON output when the power is turned on, XOFF output when the power is  
turned OFF)  
4: RTS protocol  
(No XON output when the power is turned on, no XOFF output when the  
power is turned OFF)  
h:  
Language for LCD messages  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
2: Ignore  
3: Ignore  
4: Ignore  
5: Ignore  
6: Ignore  
i:  
Forward feed standby after an issue  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
j:  
Head up operation after a label is cut  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
k:  
l:  
Ribbon saving system  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
Type of control code  
0: Automatic selection  
1: ESC, LF, NUL mode  
2: {, |, } mode  
m:  
n:  
Ribbon type selection  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
Strip status selection  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
- 168 -  
o:  
p:  
[FEED] key function  
0: FEED: Feeds one label.  
1: PRINT: Prints data from the image buffer on one label.  
Kanji code selection  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
qq: Euro code setting  
“20” to “FF” (Specify the hex code in 2 bytes of ASCII code)  
*1  
r:  
Automatic head broken dots check  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
s:  
t:  
Centronics ACK/BUSY timing setting  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
Web printer function setting  
0: Ignore  
1: Ignore  
Explanation  
(1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.  
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command become effective  
when the power is turned on or the printer is reset.  
*1: To specify the hex code to be set in 2 bytes of ASCII code as shown below:  
Example 1: To set 36H: ”36” (33H, 36H)  
Example 2: To set 42H: ”42” (34H, 32H)  
Example 3: To set FFH: ”FF” (46H, 46H)  
- 169 -  
6.4.2 FINE ADJUSTMENT VALUE SET COMMAND  
[ESC] Z2; 2  
Function  
Format  
Term  
Sets various fine adjustment values on the printer.  
[ESC] Z2; 2, abbbcdddeffghhhijjkllmnnoppqqrr [LF] [NUL]  
a:  
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a feed length fine  
adjustment is to be made.  
+: Ignore  
-: Ignore  
bbb: Feed length fine adjustment value  
Ignore  
c:  
Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a cut position (or strip  
position) fine adjustment is to be made.  
+: Ignore  
-: Ignore  
ddd: Fine adjustment value for the cut position (or strip position)  
Ignore  
e:  
Indicates whether the back feed is to be increased or decreased.  
+: Ignore  
-: Ignore  
ff:  
g:  
Back feed length fine adjustment value  
Ignore  
Indicates the direction, positive or negative, in which the X-coordinate fine  
adjustment is to be made.  
+: Positive direction  
-: Negative direction  
hhh: X-coordinate fine adjustment value  
*1  
000 to 995 (in units of 0.5 mm)  
i:  
Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the thermal transfer print  
mode.  
+: Ignore  
-: Ignore  
jj:  
k:  
Print density fine adjustment value (for the thermal transfer print mode)  
Ignore  
Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density in the direct thermal print  
mode.  
+: Ignore  
-: Ignore  
ll:  
Print density fine adjustment value (for the direct thermal print mode)  
Ignore  
m:  
Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon rewind motor voltage  
-: Ignore  
nn: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon rewind motor voltage  
Ignore  
- 170 -  
o:  
Fine adjustment direction for the ribbon back tension motor voltage  
+: Ignore  
-: Ignore  
pp: Fine adjustment value for the ribbon back tension motor voltage  
Ignore  
qq: Reflective sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value  
Ignore  
rr:  
Transmissive sensor manual threshold fine adjustment value  
Ignore  
ss:  
Sensor sensitivity adjustment value  
00 to 63  
Explanation  
(1) This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.  
(2) With some exceptions, the parameters set by this command become effective when  
the power is turned on or the printer is reset.  
(3) Sensor sensitivity adjustment value  
This value is used to adjust the sensor sensitivity. Available values are from 00 to 63  
is the lowest sensitivity, while 63 is the highest sensitivity.  
Normally, the sensor sensitivity can be set automatically when calibrating the  
sensor. This value can be seen from the self-test printing.  
For example)  
SENSOR TRANSMISSIVE [17]  
This means current sensor type is transmissive sensor and sensitivity level is 17. If  
the automatic sensor calibration cannot register label gap or black mark, use this  
parameter to adjust sensitivity manually.  
*1: The value can be set in units of 0.1 mm. However, the value which is actually set  
on the printer is in units of 0.5 mm. When a value from 0.0 mm to 0.4 mm is set, it  
is actually set on the printer as 0.0 mm. Also when a value from 0.5 mm to 0.9 mm  
is set, it is actually set on the printer as 0.5 mm.  
- 171 -  
6.4.3 BATCH RESET COMMAND  
[ESC] Z0 (zero)  
Function  
Format  
Resets the printer.  
[ESC] Z0 [LF] [NUL]  
Explanation  
• This command is not executed until the printer enters an idle state.  
• Some values in the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) and the Fine Adjustment  
Value Set Command ([ESC Z2;2]), will become effective when the printer is initialized.  
This command should be sent after the Parameter Set Command ([ESC] Z2;1) or Fine  
Adjustment Value Set Command ([ESC] Z2;2) is sent.  
- 172 -  
7. CONTROL CODE SELECTION  
(1) Automatic Selection  
This printer automatically selects [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H) or {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH)  
as an interface command control code. After the power is turned on, the program checks the data  
from the host for [ESC] and { and assumes the data whichever has been sent first to be a control  
code.  
For example, if [ESC] is sent first after the power is turned on, [ESC]. [LF]. [NUL] becomes a control  
code, and if { is sent first, { . | . } becomes a control code. Control code selection is made for every  
command. If the first command is [ESC] ~ [LF] [NUL], followed by [ESC], the control code becomes  
[ESC]. [LF]. [NUL], and if it is followed by { , the control code for the next command becomes { . | . }.  
When { . | . } is a control code, the data of 00H to 1FH in { ~ | } is ignored. However, the data of  
00H to 1FH becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or Writable Character  
Command in hexadecimal mode. When { . | . } is a control code, { . | . } cannot be used in the data  
of the Data Command or Display Command.  
Power ON  
Read received data  
No  
<Received data ESC?>  
No  
Yes  
<Received data { ?>  
Yes  
Assume control code  
to be ESC. LF. NUL  
Assume control code  
to be { . | . }  
Discard read  
data  
Command processing  
(2) Manual Selection (ESC. LF. NUL)  
The control code of the command is [ESC] (1BH). [LF] (0AH). [NUL] (00H), and the control code  
selection is not performed.  
(3) Manual Selection ({ . | . })  
The control code of the command is {(7BH). | (7CH).} (7DH), and the control code selection is not  
performed. Data of 00H to 1FH is ignored and discarded in this mode. However, data of 00H to  
1FH becomes valid while processing the Graphic Command or Writable Character Command in  
hexadecimal mode. { . | . } cannot be used in the data of the Data Command or Display Command.  
- 173 -  
8. ERROR PROCESSING  
If the printer detects any of the following errors, it will display the error message (LED), makes status  
response (serial interface, parallel interface and USB interface), and stops its operation.  
8.1 COMMUNICATION ERRORS  
(1) Command Errors  
An error results if a command length error, command transmission sequence error, command  
format error or parameter designation error is found in analyzing the command. An error results if  
the Format Command of a field is not transmitted and its Data Command is transmitted. When  
attempting to call a PC Save Command of a save identifier which is not saved, an error results.  
An undefined command is not detected as an error, and data is discarded until [NUL] or [}] is  
received.  
(2) Hardware Errors  
An error results if a framing error, overrun error or parity error is found during data reception when  
using the serial interface (RS-232C).  
* At the moment when a command error or hardware error occurs, the printer shows the error  
message and makes status response before stopping. The Status Request Command and  
Reset Command only can be processed and other commands are not processed. When the  
printer is restored by the [RESTART] key, the printer enters the initial state which is obtained  
after the power is turned on.  
8.2 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING  
(1) Feed Jam  
When the relation between the programmed label (or tag) pitch (A) and the label (or tag) pitch  
detected by the sensor (B) is not indicated by the following formula, an error will result: (A) ×  
50% (B) (A) × 150%  
• A paper jam has occurred during paper feed.  
• The paper is not placed properly.  
• The actual label does not match the type of the sensor.  
• The sensor position is not aligned with the black mark.  
• The actual label size does not meet the designated label length.  
• No label-to-label gap is detected due to preprint.  
• The sensor is not thoroughly adjusted.  
(The sensor is not adjusted for the label to be used.)  
If the stripped label does not cover the strip sensor when printing or feeding is completed in  
strip mode, an error will result.  
- 174 -  
(2) Cutter Error  
• Cutter  
When the cutter does not move from the cutter home position 50 msec or more after the cutter  
solenoid is driven, an error will result.  
The cutter moves from the home position, however, it does not return to the home position after  
500 msec.  
(3) Label End  
When the transmissive sensor and reflective sensor detect the label end state in 10 mm  
continuously, an error will result.  
If the transmissive sensor and reflective sensor detect the label end state when an issue, feed  
and ejection is attempted in a printer stop state, an error will result.  
(4) Head Open Error  
If the head open sensor detects the open state when an issue, feed and ejection is attempted in  
a printer stop state, an error will result.  
(5) Thermal Head Excessive Temperature  
When the thermal head temperature detection thermistor detects an excessively high  
temperature, an error will result.  
- 175 -  
8.3 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES  
(1) Write Error  
• An error has occurred in writing in the flash memory board.  
(2) Format Error  
• An erase error has occurred in formatting the flash memory board.  
(3) Memory Full  
• Storing is impossible because of the insufficient flash memory capacity.  
* At the moment when an error occurs, the printer shows the error message, makes status  
response, then stops. The Status Request Command and Reset Command only can be  
processed and other commands are not processed. Restoration using the [FEED] key is  
impossible.  
- 176 -  
9. STATUS RESPONSE  
9.1 SERIAL INTERFACE  
9.1.1 FUNCTIONS  
There are the following two kinds of status response functions.  
(1) Status transmission function at the end of normal transmission and occurrence of an error  
(auto status transmission)  
If the option for “status response” has been selected, the printer sends status to the host  
computer when the printer performs a feed or completes an issue normally (For batch/cut  
mode: after the designated number of labels are printed, For strip mode: after one label is  
printed). In the online mode, the head up/down status is sent to the host computer.  
When each error occurs, the status is sent to the host computer.  
The remaining count in the status response indicates the remaining count of the batch  
currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted.  
(2) Status transmission function by status request (Status Request Command)  
Upon request to send status by the Status Request Command, the printer sends the latest  
status indicating its current state to the host computer, regardless of the option for “status  
response/no status response” . The remaining count indicates the remaining count of the  
batch currently being printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is  
transmitted. This command is not stored in the receive buffer and executed immediately  
when it is received.  
• Strip status  
The strip status (05H) returned by the Status Request Command depends on the system  
mode setting.  
When the strip status of the system mode is set to “1”:  
If the Status Request Command is sent when a label is on the strip shaft (for  
example, while idling, after feeding a label, after printing all labels), the printer  
returns (00H).  
When the strip status of the system mode is set to “2”:  
If the Status Request Command is sent when a label is on the strip shaft (for  
example, while idling, after feeding a label, after printing all labels), the printer  
returns (05H).  
If the Status Request Command is sent while a label is being printed or issued, the strip  
status (05H) is returned for both settings.  
9.1.2 STATUS FORMAT  
SOH STX  
Status  
Remaining count  
ETX EOT CR  
LF  
01H 02H 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH  
Remaining count  
• 0000 ~ 9999  
(Fixed as 0000 in save mode)  
Type of status  
• “1” (31H) (Status Request Command)  
• “2” (32H) (Auto status transmission)  
Detail status  
- 177 -  
9.1.3 DETAIL STATUS  
Detail Status  
Auto Status  
Status Request  
Command  
Printer Status  
Transmission  
The head was closed in the online mode.  
The head was opened in the online mode.  
Operating (Analyzing command, drawing,  
printing, feeding)  
00  
01  
00  
01  
02  
In pause  
04  
05  
06  
Waiting for stripping  
A command error was found in analyzing the  
command.  
06  
A parity error, overrun error or framing error  
occurred during communication by RS-232C  
A paper jam occurred during paper feed.  
An abnormal condition occurred at the cutter.  
The label has run out.  
07  
07  
11  
12  
13  
15  
11  
12  
13  
15  
An attempt was made to feed or issue with the  
head open.  
(except the [FEED] key)  
The thermal head temperature has become  
excessively high.  
18  
18  
A label issue is completed normally.  
The feed has been terminated normally.  
In writable character or  
40  
41  
02  
PC command save mode  
50  
51  
54  
50  
51  
54  
An error has occurred in writing data  
into the flash memory board.  
An erase error has occurred in  
formatting the flash memory board.  
Saving failed because of the  
insufficient capacity of the flash  
memory board.  
The flash memory board is being initialized.  
An EEPROM for back up cannot be  
read/written properly.  
02  
02  
02  
- 178 -  
9.2 PARALLEL INTERFACE  
Printer Status  
Output Signal  
BUSY PAUSE FAULT  
PE  
L
In the online mode  
L
H
H
L
H
H
L
In the online mode (communicating)  
The head was opened in the online mode.  
In a pause state  
L, H  
L
L
L
L
L
Data was set from the host with the receive  
buffer full.  
H
H
L
After data was sent from the host with the  
receive buffer full, some data is processed and  
room becomes available.  
H
H
L
Initialize process in execution (After the power  
is turned on or INIT is received)  
A command error has occurred in analyzing  
the command.  
L
L
L
L
L
L
A paper jam occurred during paper feed.  
An abnormal condition occurred at the cutter.  
The label has run out.  
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
H
L
A feed or an issue was attempted with the  
head opened. (except the [FEED] key)  
The thermal head temperature has become  
excessively high.  
L
H
L
L
L
L
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
In writable character or PC command save  
mode  
An error has occurred in writing data into the  
flash memory board.  
An erase error has occurred in formatting the  
flash memory board.  
Saving failed because of the insufficient  
capacity of the flash memory board.  
The flash memory card is being initialized.  
(Initialization is carried out for approximately  
15 seconds)  
A momentary power interruption has occurred.  
An EEPROM for back-up cannot be  
read/written properly.  
L
L
L
L
L
L
- 179 -  
Printer Status  
Output Signal  
BUSY PAUSE FAULT  
PE  
(a) A command has been fetched from an  
odd address.  
L
L
L
(b) Word data has been accessed from a  
place other than the boundary of the word  
data.  
(c) Long word data has been accessed from  
a place other than the boundary of the  
long word data.  
(d) An undefined command in a place other  
than the delay slot has been decoded.  
(e) An undefined command in the delay slot  
has been decoded.  
(f) A command which rewrites the data in the  
delay slot has been decoded.  
- 180 -  
10. LED INDICATIONS  
Restoration Acceptance  
by  
of Status  
Request  
LED Indication  
No.  
Printer Status  
[FEED] key  
Reset  
Command  
Yes/No  
Yes/No  
Green  
Red  
Orange  
U
U
1
2
In the online mode  
-
-
Yes  
Yes  
O
U
In the online mode  
(Communicating)  
U
U
The head was opened in the  
online mode.  
-
Yes  
U
U
O
3
4
In a pause state  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
A parity error, overrun error  
or framing error has occurred  
during communication by RS-  
232C.  
U
U
O
O
5
6
A paper jam occurred during  
paper feed.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
An abnormal condition  
occurred at the cutter.  
The label has run out.  
A feed or an issue was  
attempted with the head  
opened.  
U
U
7
8
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
(except the [FEED] key)  
The thermal head  
U
9
No  
Yes  
temperature has become  
excessively high.  
O
U
U
10  
11  
In writable character or PC  
command save mode  
An error has occurred in  
writing data into the flash  
memory board.  
-
Yes  
Yes  
No  
U
U
U
12  
13  
14  
An erase error has occurred  
in formatting the flash  
memory board.  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
Saving failed because of the  
insufficient capacity of the  
flash memory card.  
U
The flash memory board is  
being initialized.  
(Initialization is carried out for  
approximately 15 seconds)  
An EEPROM for back-up  
cannot be read/written  
properly.  
U
15  
No  
No  
- 181 -  
Restoration Acceptance  
by  
of Status  
Request  
LED Indication  
No.  
16  
Printer Status  
[FEED]  
Reset  
key  
Yes/No  
Command  
Yes/No  
Green  
Red  
Orange  
U
(a) A command has been  
fetched from an odd  
address.  
No  
No  
(b) Word data has been  
accessed from a place  
other than the boundary  
of the word data.  
(c) Long word data has  
been accessed from a  
place other than the  
boundary of the long  
word data.  
(d) An undefined command  
in a place other than the  
delay slot has been  
decoded.  
(e) An undefined command  
in the delay slot has  
been decoded.  
(f) A command which  
rewrites the data in the  
delay slot has been  
decoded.  
NOTE 1:  
:On  
Oꢀ: Blinking  
Uꢀ: Off  
- 182 -  
11. CHARACTER CODE TABLE  
The followings are the character code tables. However, the characters which can be printed are  
different according to the character type. For the character which can be printed, refer to the print  
sample described later.  
11.1 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER  
(Bit map font type: E, J, N, O, Q)  
(1) PC-850  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
ð
Ð
Ê
Ë
È
1
Í
Ó
ß
-
!
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
Ô
Ò
õ
=
¾
§
÷
¸
#
$
%
&
s
t
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
Õ
µ
û
ã
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
Ã
Î
þ
(
ÿ
¿
®
¬
½
¼
¡
Ï
Þ
Ú
Û
Ù
ý
°
)
Ö
Ü
ø
£
¨
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
¹
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
³
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
×
¢
¥
¦
Ì
Ý
¯
²
^
~
Ä
Å
«
»
/
_
ƒ
¤
´
(2) PC-8  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
α
β
Γ
π
Σ
σ
µ
τ
±
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
ò
û
÷
°
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ê
ë
è
ÿ
¿
Φ
Θ
)
Ö
Ü
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
ï
î
¢
£
½
¼
¡
δ
ε
<
=
>
?
n
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
2
^
_
~
Ä
Å
Pt  
«
/
»
- 183 -  
(3) PC-852  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
É
á
í
Ó
ß
!
Ð
Ë
ó
ú
Ô
#
$
%
&
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
Á
Â
§
÷
¸
Í
Î
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
(
°
¨
)
ë
Ö
Ü
Ú
*
J
j
¬
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
ý
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Ý
^
~
Ä
×
«
»
/
_
¤
(4) PC-857  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
º
Ó
ß
-
!
"
ª
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
Ê
Ë
È
Ô
Ò
õ
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
¾
§
÷
¸
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
Á
Â
À
©
Õ
µ
û
ã
Í
Î
Ï
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
Ã
(
¿
®
¬
×
Ú
Û
Ù
ì
°
)
Ö
Ü
ø
¨
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
½
¼
¡
¹
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
³
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be  
changed  
in  
the  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Ø
¢
¥
¦
Ì
ÿ
¯
²
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
^
~
Ä
Å
«
/
_
»
¤
´
- 184 -  
(5) PC-851  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
±
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
!
#
$
%
&
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
§
û
ù
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
ê
ë
è
Ï
¸
°
¨
(
)
Ö
Ü
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
½
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
Ä
«
»
/
_
(6) PC-855  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
§
^
~
«
»
/
_
¤
- 185 -  
(7) PC-1250  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
¤
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
!
Á
Â
á
â
#
$
%
&
s
t
Ó
Ô
ó
ô
´
µ
·
Ä
ä
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
¦
§
¨
Ö
×
ö
÷
G
H
I
g
h
i
Ç
É
Ë
ç
é
ë
(
¸
)
©
*
J
j
Ú
ú
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
Ü
Ý
ü
ý
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
Î
í
î
^
~
®
/
_
ß
(8) PC-1251  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
¤
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
·
¦
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
)
©
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
®
/
_
- 186 -  
(9) PC-1252  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
#
$
%
&
s
t
³
´
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
(
^
˜
¸
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
)
©
ª
¹
*
J
j
º
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
¼
½
¾
¿
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
Î
î
þ
ÿ
/
_
Ï
ï
(10) PC-1253  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ƒ
£
¤
¥
¦
³
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
(
)
©
ª
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
½
^
~
®
/
_
- 187 -  
(11) PC-1254  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
!
¡
¢
£
¤
¥
¦
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
¹
#
$
%
&
s
t
³
´
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
¨
(
^
˜
¸
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
)
©
ª
¹
*
J
j
º
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
¼
½
¾
¿
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
Î
î
/
_
Ï
ß
ï
ÿ
(12) PC-1257  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
!
"
¢
£
¤
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
³
Ó
ó
´
Ä
Å
ä
å
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
·
Õ
Ö
×
õ
ö
÷
¦
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
Ø
©
ø
¹
)
É
é
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
¼
½
¾
æ
Ü
ß
ü
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
¨
¸
¯
^
~
®
/
_
Æ
- 188 -  
(13) LATIN9  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
±
²
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
!
¡
¢
£
C
¥
#
$
%
&
s
t
³
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
µ
·
G
H
I
g
h
i
§
(
Ø
Ù
Ú
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
)
©
ª
¹
º
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
í
^
~
®
A
Î
î
þ
ÿ
/
_
¿
Ï
ï
(14) Arabic  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
/
_
- 189 -  
11.2 PRESENTATION (Bit map font type: M)  
(1) PC-850, PC-857  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
¥
/
_
(2) PC-8  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
M
N
O
]
¥
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 190 -  
(3) PC-852  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 191 -  
(5) PC-1252, PC-1254  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
¥
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
^
˜
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
(6) PC-1253  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
¥
B
C
C
D
E
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 192 -  
(7) LATIN9  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
`
7
8
9
A
B
C
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
P
Q
R
S
T
!
"
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
#
$
%
&
'
C
¥
U
V
W
X
Y
G
H
I
(
)
J
*
J
Z
+
;
K
L
{
K
L
,
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
M
N
O
]
M
N
O
^
~
/
_
- 193 -  
11.3 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 (Outline font type: A, B)  
(1) PC-850  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
ß
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
ê
ë
è
ï
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
C
-
!
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
$
%
&
s
t
ö
õ
µ
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
ò
§
÷
û
ã
G
H
I
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ÿ
¿
°
)
Ö
Ü
ø
*
J
j
¬
½
¼
¡
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
£
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
Ø
¢
¥
²
^
~
Ä
Å
«
/
_
ƒ
»
¤
(2) PC-8  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
C
α
β
Γ
π
Σ
σ
µ
τ
±
!
"
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
ª
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
ò
û
÷
°
g
h
i
ù
º
(
ê
ë
è
ÿ
¿
Φ
Θ
)
Ö
Ü
J
j
¬
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
ï
î
¢
£
½
¼
¡
δ
ε
<
=
>
?
n
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
ì
¥
2
^
_
~
Ä
Å
Pt  
«
/
»
- 194 -  
(3) PC-852  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
ß
F
-
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
É
á
í
C
C
!
ó
ú
#
$
%
&
s
t
ô
ö
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
§
÷
G
H
I
g
h
i
ç
(
°
)
ë
Ö
Ü
*
J
j
¬
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
<
=
>
?
\
|
î
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
Ä
«
»
/
_
¤
(4) PC-857  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
å
ç
É
æ
Æ
ô
á
í
C
C
º
ª
-
!
"
ß
±
ó
ú
ñ
Ñ
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ö
õ
µ
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
ò
§
÷
û
ã
g
h
i
ù
(
ê
ë
è
¿
¬
°
)
Ö
Ü
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
ï
î
ø
£
½
¼
¡
<
=
>
?
ì
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Ø
¢
¥
ÿ
2
^
_
~
Ä
Å
«
/
»
¤
- 195 -  
(5) PC-851  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
Ç
ü
é
â
ä
à
C
C
!
"
±
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ô
ö
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
§
°
û
ù
g
h
i
ç
ê
ë
è
(
)
Ö
Ü
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
Ï
î
½
<
=
>
?
£
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
Ä
8
«
»
/
(6) PC-855  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
(
)
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
§
^
_
~
«
»
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
/
¤
- 196 -  
(7) PC-1250  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
Ä
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
á
â
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ó
ô
¤
§
ä
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Ö
ö
÷
g
h
i
Ç
É
ç
(
)
é
J
j
ú
ü
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
<
=
>
?
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
Î
/
(8) PC-1251  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
¤
§
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
g
h
i
(
)
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
/
- 197 -  
(9) PC-1252  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
Ñ
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
!
"
¡
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
¢
£
¤
¥
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
Ä
Å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Æ
Ç
Ö
Ø
g
h
i
§
(
^
˜
è
é
ê
)
J
j
ª
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
ì
û
ü
<
=
>
?
¼
½
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
î
/
¿
ï
ÿ
(10) PC-1253  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
£
¤
¥
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
g
h
i
§
(
)
J
j
ª
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
½
^
_
~
/
- 198 -  
(11) PC-1254  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ƒ
9
A
B
C
D
Ñ
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
!
"
¡
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
¢
£
¤
¥
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
Ä
Å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Æ
Ç
Ö
Ø
g
h
i
§
(
^
˜
è
é
ê
)
É
J
j
ª
º
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
ì
û
ü
<
=
>
?
¼
½
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
î
/
¿
Ï
ÿ
(12) PC-1257  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
!
"
¢
£
¤
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
ó
Ä
Å
ä
å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
õ
ö
÷
Ö
g
h
i
§
·
(
Ø
ø
)
É
é
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
<
=
>
?
¼
½
Ü
ß
ü
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
/
Æ
æ
- 199 -  
(13) LATIN9  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
Ñ
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
²
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
!
"
¡
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
¢
£
¤
¥
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
Ä
Å
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
µ
·
Æ
Ç
Ö
Ø
g
h
i
§
(
è
é
ê
)
É
J
j
ª
º
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
«
¬
»
ë
ì
û
ü
<
=
>
?
Ü
ß
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
Í
^
_
~
î
/
¿
B
Ï
ÿ
(14) Arabic  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
P
Q
R
S
T
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
C
C
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
(
)
J
j
*
+
,
B
C
D
E
F
;
K
L
[
\
k
l
{
|
<
=
>
?
The Euro code (B0H) can  
be changed in the  
parameter setting on Z2;1  
command.  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
_
~
/
- 200 -  
11.4 TrueType FONT  
(1) PC-850  
(2) PC-8  
- 201 -  
(3) PC-852  
(4) PC-857  
- 202 -  
(5) PC-851  
(6) PC-855  
- 203 -  
(7) PC-1250  
(8) PC-1251  
- 204 -  
(9) PC-1252  
(10) PC-1253  
- 205 -  
(11) PC-1254  
(12) PC-1257  
- 206 -  
(13) LATIN9  
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F  
0 @ P  
`
1 A Q a  
2 B R b  
p
q
r
° À Ð à  
± Á Ñ á  
² Â Ò â  
³ Ã Ó ã  
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
!
¡
"
¢
£
# 3 C S c  
$ 4 D T d  
% 5 E U e  
& 6 F V f  
s
t
C ZŠ Ä Ô ä  
u
v
¥ µ Å Õ å  
ŠS ¶ Æ Ö æ ö  
'
(
7 G W g w  
§
s
· Ç × ç ÷  
8 H X h  
x
y
z
{
|
z È Ø è  
Š Š  
ø
ù
ú
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
)
9
:
I Y i  
© ¹ É Ù é  
*
+
,
J Z  
j
k
l
ª
º
Ê Ú ê  
; K [  
< L  
« » Ë Û ë  
¬ Œ Ì Ü ì  
- œ Í Ý í  
\
– = M ] m }  
.
> N ^ n ~  
? O _ o  
®
¯
Î
Ï
Þ
ß
î
ï
Ÿ
/
¿
(14) Arabic  
- 207 -  
12. BAR CODE TABLE  
(1) WPC (JAN, EAN, UPC)  
(2) CODE39 (Standard)  
ITF, MSI, UCC/EAN128, Industrial 2 of 5  
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
$
%
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
J
*
+
K
L
M
N
O
/
(3) CODE39 (Full ASCII)  
[Transfer code]  
[Drawing code]  
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
/A  
/B  
/C  
/D  
/E  
/F  
/G  
/H  
/I  
0
1
%V  
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
%W +P  
+A +Q  
"
2
+B  
+C  
+D  
+E  
+F  
+R  
+S  
+T  
+U  
+V  
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
3
4
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
5
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
6
G
H
I
g
h
i
7
G
H
I
+G +W  
(
8
+H  
+I  
+X  
+Y  
+Z  
)
9
*
J
j
/J  
/Z  
%F  
%G  
%H  
%I  
%J  
J
+J  
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
/K  
/L  
K
L
%K +K %P  
%L +L %Q  
<
=
>
?
\
|
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
M
N
O
%M +M %R  
%N +N %S  
%O +O %T  
^
~
.
/
_
/O  
- 208 -  
(4) NW-7  
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
A
B
C
D
a
b
c
d
e
$
t
*
+
n
6
/
(5) CODE93  
[Transfer code]  
[Drawing code]  
2
3
4
5
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
SP  
/A  
/B  
/C  
/D  
/E  
/F  
/G  
/H  
/I  
0
1
%V  
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
%W +P  
+A +Q  
"
2
+B  
+C  
+D  
+E  
+F  
+R  
+S  
+T  
+U  
+V  
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
3
4
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
5
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
6
G
H
I
g
h
i
7
G
H
I
+G +W  
(
8
+H  
+I  
+X  
+Y  
+Z  
)
9
J
j
/J  
+
/Z  
%F  
%G  
%H  
%I  
%J  
J
+J  
*
+
;
K
L
k
l
K
L
%K +K %P  
%L +L %Q  
,
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
/L  
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
M
N
O
%M +M %R  
%N +N %S  
%O +O %T  
^
~
.
/
_
/
- 209 -  
(6) CODE128  
[Transfer code]  
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1  
STX DC2  
ETX DC3  
EOT DC4  
ENQ NAK  
ACK SYN  
BEL ETB  
BS CAN  
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
[Drawing code]  
G
H
I
g
h
i
Value Code Table  
(
HT  
EM  
)
LF SUB  
VT ESC  
J
j
*
+
;
K
L
k
l
FF  
CR  
SO  
SI  
FS  
GS  
RS  
US  
,
.
<
=
>
?
\
|
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
/
_
How to transmit control code data:  
NUL (00H)  
SOH (01H)  
STX (02H)  
to  
>@ (3EH, 40H)  
>A (3EH, 41H)  
>B (3EH, 42H)  
GS (1DH)  
RS (1EH)  
US (1FH)  
>] (3EH, 5DH)  
> ^ (3EH, 5EH)  
>_ (3EH, 5FH)  
How to transmit special codes:  
Value  
30 (Character >)  
>0  
>1  
>2  
>3  
>4  
>5  
>6  
>7  
>8  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
Designation of start code:  
START (CODE A)  
START (CODE B)  
START (CODE C)  
>7  
>6  
>5  
- 210 -  
Value Code Table  
VALUE CODE CODE CODE  
VALUE CODE CODE CODE  
VALUE CODE CODE CODE  
A
B
C
A
B
C
A
B
C
0
SP  
!
SP  
!
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
D
E
D
E
F
G
H
I
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
101  
102  
BS  
HT  
h
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
CODE B  
1
i
j
2
"
"
F
LF  
3
#
$
%
&
'
#
$
%
&
'
G
VT  
k
4
H
FF  
l
5
I
CR  
m
n
o
p
q
r
6
J
J
SO  
7
K
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
SI  
8
(
(
L
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
9
)
)
M
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
*
*
N
+
,
+
,
O
s
P
t
.
.
Q
u
v
R
/
/
S
w
x
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
T
U
y
V
SUB  
ESC  
FS  
z
W
X
{
¦
Y
GS  
}
Z
RS  
~
DEL  
[
US  
\
\
FNC3 FNC3  
FNC2 FNC2  
SHIFT SHIFT  
CODE C CODE C  
]
]
^
^
;
;
_
_
`
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
NUL  
SOH  
STX  
ETX  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
FNC4  
CODE B  
a
b
c
FNC4  
CODE A CODE A  
FNC1 FNC1 FNC1  
d
e
f
103  
104  
105  
START CODE A  
START CODE B  
START CODE C  
g
- 211 -  
(7) Data Matrix  
The code to be used is designated using the format ID.  
Format ID  
Code  
Details  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Numerics  
Letters  
0 to 9 space  
A to Z space  
Alphanumerics, symbols  
Alphanumerics  
ASCII (7-bit)  
0 to 9 A to Z space . , - /  
0 to 9 A to Z space  
00H to 7FH  
ISO (8-bit)  
00H to FFH (Kanji)  
[Transfer Code]  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1  
STX DC2  
ETX DC3  
EOT DC4  
ENQ NAK  
ACK SYN  
BEL ETB  
BS CAN  
HT EM  
!
#
$
%
&
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB  
VT ESC  
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF  
FS  
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS  
SO RS  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI  
US  
/
_
How to send control code data  
NUL (00H)  
SOH (01H)  
STX (02H)  
to  
>@ (3EH, 40H)  
>A  
>B  
(3EH, 41H)  
(3EH, 42H)  
GS (1DH)  
RS (1EH)  
US (1FH)  
>]  
>^  
>_  
(3EH, 5DH)  
(3EH, 5EH)  
(3EH, 5FH)  
How to send a special code  
(3EH)  
>
>0  
(3EH, 30H)  
How to send a Kanji code  
Shift JIS  
JIS hexadecimal  
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)  
- 212 -  
(8) PDF417  
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.  
Mode Code Details  
EXC mode  
Alphanumerics, symbol 0 to 9 A to Z a to z space ! ”  
# $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - .  
/ : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^  
_ ` { | } ~  
CR HT  
Binary/ASCII Plus  
mode  
Binary International  
Character Set  
Numerics  
00H to FFH (Kanji)  
Numeric  
0 to 9  
Compaction mode  
[Transfer Code]  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1  
STX DC2  
ETX DC3  
EOT DC4  
ENQ NAK  
ACK SYN  
BEL ETB  
BS CAN  
HT EM  
!
#
$
%
&
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB  
VT ESC  
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF  
FS  
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS  
SO RS  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI  
US  
/
_
How to send control code data  
NUL (00H)  
SOH (01H)  
STX (02H)  
to  
>@ (3EH, 40H)  
>A  
>B  
(3EH, 41H)  
(3EH, 42H)  
GS (1DH)  
RS (1EH)  
US (1FH)  
>]  
(3EH, 5DH)  
(3EH, 5EH)  
(3EH, 5FH)  
>^  
>_  
How to send a special code  
(3EH)  
>
>0  
(3EH, 30H)  
How to send a Kanji code  
Shift JIS  
JIS hexadecimal  
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)  
- 213 -  
(9) MicroPDF417  
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.  
Mode  
Details  
Upper case letters, A to Z, space  
space  
Binary International 00H to FFH (Kanji)  
Character Set  
Numerics  
0 to 9  
[Transfer Code]  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1  
STX DC2  
ETX DC3  
EOT DC4  
ENQ NAK  
ACK SYN  
BEL ETB  
BS CAN  
HT EM  
!
#
$
%
&
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB  
VT ESC  
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF  
FS  
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS  
SO RS  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI  
US  
/
_
How to send control code data  
NUL (00H)  
SOH (01H)  
STX (02H)  
to  
>@ (3EH, 40H)  
>A  
>B  
(3EH, 41H)  
(3EH, 42H)  
GS (1DH)  
RS (1EH)  
US (1FH)  
>]  
(3EH, 5DH)  
(3EH, 5EH)  
(3EH, 5FH)  
>^  
>_  
How to send a special code  
(3EH)  
>
>0  
(3EH, 30H)  
How to send a Kanji code  
Shift JIS  
JIS hexadecimal  
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)  
- 214 -  
(10) QR code  
When manual mode is selected in the Format Command  
Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode  
Mode selection  
Binary mode  
Mode selection  
Mixed mode  
Data  
Data to be printed  
No. of data strings  
(4 digits)  
Data to be printed  
“,” (comma)  
“,” (comma)  
Data  
Data  
The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji. However, since  
the data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used should be designated  
by selecting the mode.  
Mode  
Code  
Details  
N
A
Numerals  
0 to 9  
Alphanumerics, symbols  
A to Z 0 to 9 space  
$ % * + - . / :  
B
K
Binary (8-bit)  
Kanji  
00H to FFH  
Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal  
If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.  
When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code:  
Data to be printed  
[Transfer code for QR code]  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
SOH DC1  
STX DC2  
ETX DC3  
EOT DC4  
ENQ NAK  
ACK SYN  
BEL ETB  
BS CAN  
HT EM  
!
q
r
#
$
%
&
s
t
u
v
G
H
I
g
h
i
w
(
x
)
y
LF SUB  
VT ESC  
*
J
j
z
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
{
FF  
FS  
<
=
>
?
\
|
}
CR GS  
SO RS  
-
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
^
~
SI  
US  
/
_
DEL  
* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.  
- 215 -  
How to send control code data  
NUL (00H)  
SOH (01H)  
STX (02H)  
to  
>@ (3EH, 40H)  
>A (3EH, 41H)  
>B (3EH, 42H)  
GS (1DH)  
RS (1EH)  
US (1FH)  
>] (3EH, 5DH)  
>^ (3EH, 5EH)  
>_ (3EH, 5FH)  
How to send a special code  
(3EH) >0 (3EH, 30H)  
>
How to send a Kanji code  
Shift JIS  
JIS hexadecimal  
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)  
Examples of data designation for QR code  
Alphanumeric mode: ABC123  
A A B C 1 2 3  
Data to be printed  
Designation of mode  
Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H  
B 0 0 0 6 > A > C > E  
Data to be printed  
No. of data strings  
Designation of mode  
Mixed mode  
Numeric mode  
Kanji mode  
: 123456  
: Kanji data  
Binary mode  
: a  
i
u
e
o
Alphanumeric and symbol mode : ABC  
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a  
i
u
e
o
, A A B C  
Data to be  
printed  
Data to be  
printed  
No. of data Data to be printed  
strings  
Data to be  
printed  
Designation of mode  
Automatic mode  
When the same data as above is designated in automatic mode:  
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a A B C  
Data to be printed  
i
u
e
o
- 216 -  
(11) Postal code  
Customer bar code  
POSTNET  
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
J
K
L
M
N
O
RM4SCC  
2
KIX CODE  
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
P
Q
R
S
T
p
q
r
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
a
b
c
d
e
f
s
t
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
u
v
w
x
y
z
g
h
i
8
9
(
)
A
B
C
D
E
F
J
J
j
K
L
K
L
k
l
M
N
O
M
N
O
m
n
o
* “(” or “)” can be designated only as a start/stop code.  
These should not be entered in data.  
If these are entered between data, no bar code is drawn.  
- 217 -  
(12) MaxiCode  
Symbol Character  
Value  
Code Set A  
Code Set B  
Code Set C  
Code Set D  
Code Set E  
Decimal  
Binary  
Character  
Decimal  
Character  
Decimal  
Character  
Decimal  
Character  
Decimal  
Character  
Decimal  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
000000  
000001  
000010  
000011  
000100  
000101  
000110  
000111  
001000  
001001  
001010  
001011  
001100  
001101  
001110  
001111  
010000  
010001  
010010  
010011  
010100  
010101  
010110  
010111  
011000  
011001  
011010  
011011  
011100  
011101  
011110  
011111  
100000  
100001  
100010  
100011  
100100  
100101  
100110  
100111  
101000  
101001  
101010  
101011  
101100  
101101  
101110  
101111  
110000  
110001  
110010  
110011  
110100  
110101  
110110  
110111  
111000  
111001  
111010  
111011  
111100  
111101  
111110  
111111  
CR  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
13  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
96  
97  
98  
99  
À
Á
Â
Ã
Ä
Å
Æ
Ç
È
É
Ê
Ë
Ì
192  
193  
194  
195  
196  
197  
198  
199  
200  
201  
202  
203  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
210  
211  
212  
213  
214  
215  
216  
217  
218  
à
á
â
ã
ä
å
æ
ç
è
é
ê
ë
ì
224  
225  
226  
227  
228  
229  
230  
231  
232  
233  
234  
235  
236  
237  
238  
239  
240  
241  
242  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
248  
249  
250  
NUL  
SOH  
STX  
ETX  
EOT  
ENQ  
ACK  
BEL  
BS  
HT  
LF  
VT  
FF  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
8
9
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
J
K
L
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Í
Î
Ï
í
î
ï
CR  
SO  
SI  
Ð
Ñ
Ò
Ó
Ô
Õ
Ö
×
ð
ñ
ò
ó
ô
õ
ö
÷
ø
ù
ú
DLE  
DC1  
DC2  
DC3  
DC4  
NAK  
SYN  
ETB  
CAN  
EM  
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
Ø
Ù
Ú
SUB  
[EC]  
[EC]  
[EC]  
[NS]  
[EC]  
[NS]  
[EC]  
[Pad]  
[Pad]  
FS  
GS  
RS  
28  
29  
30  
FS  
GS  
RS  
28  
29  
30  
FS  
GS  
RS  
28  
29  
30  
FS  
GS  
RS  
28  
29  
30  
ESC  
27  
[NS]  
[NS]  
[NS]  
Space  
32  
(
123  
Û
Ü
Ý
Þ
ß
ª
¬
±
²
219  
220  
221  
222  
223  
170  
172  
177  
178  
179  
181  
185  
186  
188  
189  
190  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
û
ü
ý
þ
ÿ
¡
251  
252  
253  
254  
255  
161  
168  
171  
175  
176  
180  
183  
184  
187  
191  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
FS  
GS  
RS  
US  
{C159}  
NBSP  
¢
£
¤
¥
28  
29  
30  
31  
[Pad]  
[Pad]  
#
$
%
&
(
)
+
,
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
)
~
DEL  
;
<
=
>
?
[
\
]
^
_
125  
126  
127  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
32  
44  
46  
47  
58  
64  
33  
124  
159  
160  
162  
163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
169  
173  
174  
182  
149  
150  
151  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
¨
«
¯
°
'
³
¹
º
¼
½
¾
{C128}  
{C129}  
{C130}  
{C131}  
{C132}  
{C133}  
{C134}  
{C135}  
{C136}  
{C137}  
§
©
SHY  
®
-
.
/
»
¿
Space  
{C138}  
{C139}  
{C140}  
{C141}  
{C142}  
{C143}  
{C144}  
{C145}  
{C146}  
{C147}  
{C148}  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
,
.
/
:
@
!
{C149}  
{C150}  
{C151}  
{C152}  
{C153}  
{C154}  
{C155}  
{C156}  
{C157}  
{C158}  
|
[Pad]  
[2 Shift A]  
[3 Shift A]  
[Pad]  
[Latch A]  
Space  
[Latch A]  
Space  
[Latch A]  
Space  
[Shift B]  
[Shift C]  
[Shift D]  
[Shift E]  
[Shift A]  
[Shift C]  
[Shift D]  
[Shift E]  
[Latch A]  
32  
32  
32  
[Lock In C]  
[Shift C]  
[Shift C]  
[Shift D]  
[Lock In E]  
[Latch B]  
[Shift D]  
[Shift E]  
[Latch B]  
[Lock In D]  
[Shift E]  
[Latch B]  
[Latch B]  
- 218 -  
How to send control code data  
SOH (01H)  
STX (02H)  
to  
>A  
>B  
(3EH, 41H)  
(3EH, 42H)  
GS (1DH)  
RS (1EH)  
US (1FH)  
>]  
(3EH, 5DH)  
(3EH, 5EH)  
(3EH, 5FH)  
>^  
>_  
How to send a special code  
(3EH)  
>
>0  
(3EH, 30H)  
How to send a Kanji code  
Shift JIS  
JIS hexadecimal  
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)  
NOTE: “NUL” code in the table cannot be used, however, it can be designated.  
If it is designated, data following “NUL” code is not printed.  
- 219 -  
(13) CP code  
[Transfer Code]  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
NUL DLE SP  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
p
q
r
SOH DC1  
STX DC2  
ETX DC3  
EOT DC4  
ENQ NAK  
ACK SYN  
BEL ETB  
BS CAN  
HT EM  
!
#
$
%
&
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
G
H
I
g
h
i
(
)
LF SUB  
VT ESC  
*
J
j
+
,
;
K
L
k
l
FF  
FS  
<
=
>
?
\
|
CR GS  
SO RS  
.
M
N
O
]
m
n
o
}
^
~
SI  
US  
/
_
How to send control code data  
NUL (00H)  
SOH (01H)  
STX (02H)  
to  
>@ (3EH, 40H)  
>A  
>B  
(3EH, 41H)  
(3EH, 42H)  
GS (1DH)  
RS (1EH)  
US (1FH)  
>]  
(3EH, 5DH)  
(3EH, 5EH)  
(3EH, 5FH)  
>^  
>_  
How to send a special code  
(3EH)  
>
>0  
(3EH, 30H)  
How to send a Kanji code  
Shift JIS  
JIS hexadecimal  
(For details, refer to the section for the Bar Code Data Command.)  
- 220 -  
13. DRAWING OF BAR CODE DATA  
:
Field to be incremented/decremented  
(The absence of a solid line invalidates incrementing/decrementing.)  
:
Field subject to printing numerals under bars.  
Type of Bar Code: JAN8, EAN8  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
8 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8  
Other than 8 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
8 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8  
Other than 8 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7  
7 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Other than 7 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 221 -  
Type of Bar Code: JAN13, EAN13  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
13 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
Other than 13 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
Input  
Data  
13 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
Other than 13 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
Input  
Data  
12 digits  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Other than 12 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11  
11 digits  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 4 digits.  
Other than 11 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11  
11 digits  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 5 digits.  
Other than 11 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 222 -  
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
Input  
Data  
12 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
Other than 12 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
Input  
Data  
12 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
Other than 12 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11  
11 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Other than 11 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10  
10 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 4 digits.  
Other than 10 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10  
10 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 5 digits.  
Not to be drawn  
Other than 10 digits  
- 223 -  
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
7 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
0
D7  
Other than 7 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
7 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
0
D7  
Other than 7 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
Calculate and reflect modulus 10 in the bar code.  
6 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
0
Other than 6 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 224 -  
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 +2 digits, EAN8 + 2 digits  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
D9 D10  
10 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8  
Other than 10 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
D9 D10  
Input  
Data  
10 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8  
Other than 10 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
9 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D  
D8 D9  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Other than 9 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 225 -  
Type of Bar Code: JAN8 +5 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
13 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8  
Other than 13 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
Input  
Data  
13 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8  
Other than 13 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
12 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D  
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Other than 12 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 226 -  
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 +2 digits, EAN13 + 2 digits  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
15 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
D14 D15  
Other than 15 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
15 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
D14 D15  
Other than 15 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14  
Input  
Data  
14 digits  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D  
D13 D14  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Other than 14 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
13 digits  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D  
D12 D13  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 4 digits.  
Other than 13 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
13 digits  
P/CD D7  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D  
D12 D13  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 5 digits.  
Other than 13 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 227 -  
Type of Bar Code: JAN13 +5 digits, EAN13 + 5 digits  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
18 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
D14 D15 D16 D17 D18  
Other than 18 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
Input  
Data  
18 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
D14 D15 D16 D17 D18  
Other than 18 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17  
Input  
Data  
17 digits  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D  
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Other than 17 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16  
16 digits  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D  
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 4 digits.  
Other than 16 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16  
16 digits  
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D  
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix price C/D 5 digits.  
Other than 16 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 228 -  
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 2 digits  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
14 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
D13 D14  
Other than 14 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
Input  
Data  
14 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
D13 D14  
Other than 14 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13  
13 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D  
D12 D13  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Other than 13 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
12 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D  
D11 D12  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 4 digits.  
Not to be drawn  
Other than 12 digits  
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
12 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D  
D11 D12  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 5 digits.  
Not to be drawn  
Other than 12 digits  
- 229 -  
Type of Bar Code: UPC-A + 5 digits  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17  
Input  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
17 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17  
Other than 17 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
Input  
Data  
17 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
D13 D14 D15 D16 D17  
Other than 17 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16  
16 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D  
D12 D13 D14 D15 D16  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Other than 16 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(4) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 4 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
15 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D  
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 4 digits.  
Not to be drawn  
Other than 15 digits  
(5) Auto affix of modulus 10 + price C/D 5 digits  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
15 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D  
D11 D12 D13 D14 D15  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix price C/D 5 digits.  
Not to be drawn  
Other than 15 digits  
- 230 -  
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 2 digits  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
D8 D9  
Input  
Data  
9 digits  
Drawing  
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
D7  
Data  
Other than 9 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
D8 D9  
Input  
Data  
9 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
0
D7  
Other than 9 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
Calculate and reflect modulus 10 C/D in  
the bar code.  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8  
8 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
C/D  
D7 D8  
Drawing  
Data  
0
Other than 8 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 231 -  
Type of Bar Code: UPC-E + 5 digits  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
Input  
Data  
12 digits  
Drawing  
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
D7  
Data  
Other than 12 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
Input  
Data  
12 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
0
D7  
Other than 12 digits  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
Calculate and reflect modulus  
10 C/D in the bar code.  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11  
11 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6  
C/D  
D7 D8 D9 D10 D11  
Drawing  
Data  
0
Other than 11 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 232 -  
Type of Bar Code: MSI  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Input  
Data  
Not recognized as a check digit.  
Max. 15 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
16 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(2) IBM modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10  
Input  
Min. 2 digits  
Max. 15 digits  
(including C/D)  
Data  
To be checked IBM as modulus 10  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10  
1 digit  
16 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of IBM modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Max. 14 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix IBM modulus 10.  
15 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(4) IBM modulus 10 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Max. 13 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix IBM modulus 10.  
Affix IBM modulus 10.  
14 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(5) IBM modulus 11 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Max. 13 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix IBM modulus 10.  
Affix IBM modulus 11.  
14 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
- 233 -  
Type of Bar Code: Interleaved 2 of 5  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Input  
Data  
Not recognized as a check digit.  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Max. 126 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
0
127 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 10 check  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Input  
Min. 2 digits  
Max. 126 digits  
(including C/D)  
Data  
To be checked as modulus 10 C/D  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Drawing  
Data  
0
1 digit  
127 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Max. 125 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
126 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(4) Auto affix of DBP modulus 10  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Max. 125 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a DBP modulus 10.  
126 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
- 234 -  
Type of Bar Code: Industrial 2 of 5  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Input  
Data  
Not recognized as a check digit.  
Max. 126 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
127 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus check character check  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Min. 2 digits  
Max. 126 digits  
(including C/D)  
To be checked as a modulus check character  
Drawing  
Data  
0
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
1 digit  
127 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus check character  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Max. 125 digits  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus check character.  
126 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
- 235 -  
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Standard)  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
Start code  
Input  
Data  
Stop code  
Not recognized as a check digit.  
Max. 123 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
Drawing  
Data  
124 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 43 check  
No. of Input Digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
Start code  
Input  
Data  
Stop code  
To be checked as modulus 43 C/D  
Min. 2 digits  
Max. 123 digits  
(including C/D)  
Drawing  
Data  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
1 digit  
124 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 43  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
Start code  
Stop code  
C/D Sp  
Max. 122 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 43 C/D.  
123 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
- 236 -  
Type of Bar Code: CODE39 (Full ASCII)  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
Start code  
Input  
Data  
Stop code  
Not recognized as a check digit.  
Max. 60 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
Drawing  
Data  
61 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(2) Modulus 43 check  
No. of Input Digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
Start code  
Input  
Data  
Stop code  
To be checked as modulus 43 C/D  
Min. 2 digits  
Max. 60 digits  
(including C/D)  
Drawing  
Data  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
1 digit  
61 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
(3) Auto affix of modulus 43  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
Start code  
Stop code  
C/D Sp  
Max. 60 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Drawing  
Data  
Affix a modulus 43 C/D.  
61 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the  
codes received are drawn.  
Type of Bar Code: NW7  
(1) No affix  
C/D check  
Auto affix  
No. of Input Digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 Sp  
Start code  
Input  
Data  
Stop code  
Max. 125 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Sp  
Drawing  
Data  
126 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
- 237 -  
Type of Bar Code: No auto selection of CODE128 (Character “>” to be also counted as a digit)  
(1) No affix  
PSEUDO103 check  
Auto affix of PSEUDO103  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11  
Min. 3 digits  
Max. 125 digits  
(including start  
code)  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
D10 D11 C/D Sp  
Affix PSEUDO103 C/D.  
Drawing  
Data  
2 digits or less  
126 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.  
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C  
Type of Bar Code: Auto selection of CODE128  
(1) No affix  
C/D check  
Auto affix of C/D  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11  
Max. 60 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 AD D5 D6 D7 AD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Sp  
Drawing  
Data  
Stop code  
Start code  
Selection code  
Affix  
PSEUDO103  
C/D.  
61 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.  
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C  
- 238 -  
Type of Bar Code: CODE93  
(1) No affix  
C/D check  
Auto affix of C/D  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
Max. 60 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D1 C/D2 Sp  
Drawing  
Data  
Stop code  
Affix a modulus 47 “K” C/D.  
Affix a modulus 47 “C” C/D.  
Start code  
61 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the  
codes received are drawn.  
Type of Bar Code: UCC/EAN128  
(1) No affix  
C/D check  
Auto affix of C/D  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19  
Data  
St FNC1 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 C/D1 C/D2 Sp  
19 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
Start code  
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.  
Affix a modulus 11 C/D.  
Stop code  
Other than 19 digits  
Not to be drawn  
- 239 -  
Type of Bar Code: POSTNET  
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5  
5 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp  
Start code  
Stop code  
Dedicated check digit  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9  
9 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D Sp  
Start code  
Drawing  
Data  
Stop code  
Dedicated check digit  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11  
11 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D Sp Fr D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D Fr  
Drawing  
Data  
Start code  
Frame  
Frame  
Stop code  
Dedicated check digit  
Other than 5, 9, and  
Not to be drawn  
11 digits  
Type of Bar Code: RM4SCC  
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D  
No. of Input Digits  
(St)  
(Sp)  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12  
Start code  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D Sp  
Input  
Data  
Stop code  
12 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
Start code  
Not to be drawn  
Stop code  
Dedicated check digit  
13 digits or more  
Type of Bar Code: KIX CODE  
(1) No affix  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18  
18 digits  
Drawing  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18  
19 digits or more  
Not to be drawn  
- 240 -  
Type of Bar Code: Customer bar code  
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20  
20 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 C/D Sp  
Drawing  
Data  
Start code  
Dedicated check digit  
Stop code  
Data of up to 20 digits is drawn. Data of 21 digits or more is discarded.  
21 digits or more  
Type of Bar Code: Highest priority customer bar code  
(1) Auto affix of dedicated C/D  
No. of Input Digits  
Input  
Data  
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19  
19 digits  
St D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 CC7 C/D Sp  
Drawing  
Data  
Start code  
CC7  
Dedicated check digit  
Stop code  
Data of up to 19 digits is drawn. Data of 20 digits or more is discarded.  
20 digits or more  
- 241 -  
14. AUTOMATIC ADDING OF START/STOP CODE  
Designation of Start/Stop Code  
Type of Bar Code  
Input Data  
12345ABC  
Drawing Data  
Standard  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
*12345*ABC*  
*12345/JABC*  
**12345ABC*  
*/J12345ABC*  
*12345ABC**  
*12345ABC/J*  
*12345*ABC*  
*12345/JABC*  
*12345ABC  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
*12345ABC  
12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
12345*ABC  
**12345ABC  
*12345ABC**  
*12345*ABC*  
12345ABC  
Omit  
(No designation)  
*12345ABC  
*12345ABC  
12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
12345*ABC  
**12345ABC  
*12345ABC**  
*12345*ABC*  
12345ABC  
**12345ABC  
*/J12345ABC  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
**12345ABC*  
*/J12345ABC*  
*12345*ABC  
*12345/JABC  
***12345ABC  
*/J/J12345ABC  
**12345ABC**  
*/J12345ABC/J*  
**12345*ABC*  
*/J12345/JABC*  
12345ABC*  
CODE 39  
Add start code  
12345ABC*  
*12345ABC  
12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
12345*ABC  
**12345ABC  
*12345ABC**  
*12345*ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
12345ABC**  
12345ABC/J*  
*12345ABC**  
*12345ABC/J*  
12345*ABC*  
12345/JABC*  
**12345ABC*  
*/J12345ABC*  
*12345ABC***  
*12345ABC/J/J*  
*12345*ABC**  
*12345/JABC/J*  
Add stop code  
- 242 -  
Designation of Start/Stop Code  
Type of Bar Code  
Input Data  
12345ABC  
Drawing Data  
Standard  
12345ABC  
12345ABC  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
Standard  
Full ASCII  
*12345ABC  
12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
12345*ABC  
**12345ABC  
*12345ABC**  
*12345*ABC*  
*12345ABC  
*12345ABC  
12345ABC*  
12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
*12345ABC*  
12345*ABC  
12345/JABC  
**12345ABC  
*/J12345ABC  
*12345ABC**  
*12345ABC/J*  
*12345*ABC*  
*12345/JABC*  
CODE 39  
Start/stop code  
not added  
Designation of Start/Stop Code  
Type of Bar Code  
Input Data  
Drawing Data  
12345678  
a12345678  
12345678c  
b12345678d  
12345a678  
ab12345678  
a12345678bc  
d12345b678c  
12345678  
a12345678a  
a12345678  
12345678c  
b12345678d  
a12345a678a  
ab12345678  
a12345678bc  
d12345b678c  
a12345678  
Omit  
(No designation)  
a12345678  
12345678c  
b12345678d  
12345a678  
ab12345678  
a12345678bc  
d12345b678c  
12345678  
aa12345678  
a12345678c  
ab12345678d  
a12345a678  
aab12345678  
aa12345678bc  
ad12345b678c  
12345678a  
Add start code  
NW7  
a12345678  
12345678c  
b12345678d  
12345a678  
ab12345678  
a12345678bc  
d12345b678c  
12345678  
a12345678a  
12345678ca  
b12345678da  
12345a678a  
ab12345678a  
a12345678bca  
d12345b678ca  
12345678  
Add stop code  
a12345678  
12345678c  
b12345678d  
12345a678  
ab12345678  
a12345678bc  
d12345b678c  
a12345678  
12345678c  
Start/stop code  
not added  
b12345678d  
12345a678  
ab12345678  
a12345678bc  
d12345b678c  
- 243 -  

Lexmark Air Conditioner 18ez User Manual
Miroil 690hd User Manual
Mitsubishi Electronics MrSlim Peh Eak User Manual
Murphy Tah 97026b User Manual
Olivetti 2301 User Manual
Pioneer Automobile Parts Gbgt Series User Manual
Samsung Us07a5 6 Ma User Manual
Sharp Af Q100rx User Manual
Trane Xe1200 User Manual
Xerox M123 User Manual